Home

Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router

1. mrrr 289 13 5 Getting the configuration with TETP mnnnnnnanenenennnnnannannenaeaennenunnnneee 291 13 6 Creating configuration files cisiessisicsteseeceeeed eve deka kal M ch kl r 294 14 Downloading firmware ennennnnnnnennnnannnnnnnannnnannnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnt 301 14 1 Downloading firmware using TMA mmmrrneenennennnennnranenaenenenennnanna 302 14 2 Downloading firmware using TML meenenneeneneennnennnnannaennnennnaanna 304 14 3 Downloading firmware using TML in boot mode nnnar 305 14 4 Downloading firmware using TFTP isata t u cace bets iles duh seethaedinotpateeeantasdatie 306 15 Technical specifications 01 siiamaani Us andku tasemeni tees 307 15 1 Router feat eS se Tatsi sit kaa ainsi hte ch Aroa ae Metanaali pa alata 308 15 2 Lihe specificatloNS2444 43t want Heese eats osteo needs e A kadakaid oan tavakeele 309 15 3 Ethernet LAN interface Satilt Inland ina jalakad nimel anal anton 311 15 4 Managemerit interface seestuinuikktutiktumitk aita makaak heata aka taan 312 15 5 Auxillary CONNGCIOl 1 rattal all ela 312 15 6 Power requirements rrnrnr 313 15 7 Mechanical dimensions siccicescscus sealing dacste cease niet kamaka kalana neue j le vaaata valge 313 15 8 Safety COMMONS PAEST TENSE eaa gehen ee tae cs eet eens Mean uae ea feet 313 15 9 O
2. The interface element has the following values The interface element value is deduced from the setting of the gateway element refer to Deducing the interface ele ment value on page 76 Select the lt opt gt value for routes that use a tunnel The gateway can be reached through the Ethernet inter face The gateway can be reached through the serial inter face discard Packets for this destination are discarded preference This defines the level of importance of the default Default 10 route with respect to routes learnt via RIP Range 1 200 RIP routes always have a preference of 60 Routes with a lower preference value are chosen over routes with higher preference value metric This determines with how much the Telindus 1420 Default 1 SHDSL Router increments the metric parameter of a Range 1 15 route Routing information includes a metric parameter Every time a router is passed this parameter is incremented Also the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router increments the metric parameter default by 1 before it writes the route in the routing table Hence the metric parameter indicates for each route how many routers have to be passed before reaching the network When several routes to a single network exist and they all have the same preference then the route with the smallest metric parameter is chosen However using the metric element you can increment the metric parameter b
3. ipProtocol This is the protocol field from the IP header Default any Range 0 255 You can specify the protocol by typing the protocol number For ease of use some common protocols can be selected from a drop down box any 0 ICMP 1 IGMP 2 IPinIP 4 TCP 6 EGP 8 IGP 9 UDP 17 RSVP 46 IGRP 88 OSPFIGP 89 TCPestablished 255 sourcePortStart This is the source port as specified in the UDP TCP Default any start optional end headers Range 0 65535 sourcePortEnd You can specify the port by typing the protocol number For ease of use some common port numbers can be selected from a drop down box any or optional 0 echo 7 discard 9 ftp data 20 ftp 21 telnet 23 smtp 25 domain 53 www http 80 pop3 110 nntp 119 snmp 161 snmptrap 162 239 50 210 syslog 514 router 520 socks 1080 I2tp 1701 telindus 1728 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 8 Configuration attributes JEEN a d destinationPortStart destinationPortEnd This is the destination port as specified in the UDP TCP headers Default any start optional end Range 0 65535 You can specify the port by typing the protocol number For ease of use some common port numbers can be selected from a drop down box see above newTosValue This is the new TOS field value When you select a new TOS field value t
4. shdslRouter management loopback ifDescr This attribute displays the interface description It is an SNMP MIB2 parameter shdslRouter management loopback ifType This attribute displays the interface type It is an SNMP MIB2 parameter shdslRouter management loopback ifMtu This attribute displays the interface its Maximum Transfer Unit i e the maximum number of bytes that one packet can contain on this interface It is an SNMP MIB2 parameter shdslRouter management loopback ifOperStatus This attribute displays the current operation status of the loop back interface The loop back interface is always up Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 247 Reference manual Status attributes 9 11 Operating system status attributes kal shdslRouter operatingSystem taskInfo This attribute displays status information about the operating system The taskinfo table contains the following elements la PET e l taskName This is the name of the task taskStatus This is the current status of the task Possible values are awake This task is actually running asleep This task is waiting on an event inactive This task slot is not active i e no task has been assigned to this slot load30s This is the relative load on the processor during the last 30 seconds load5m This is the relative load on the processor during the last 5 minutes runninginMedium Each task c
5. Use this attribute to enable or disable CHAP authentication on the PPP link For more information refer to What is CHAP authentication on page 65 The authentication attribute has the following values disabled Authentication is disabled chap This side of the link requests a CHAP authentication from the remote router shdslRouter wanInterface ppp authenPeriod Default 00000d 00h 00m 10s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s Use this attribute to define the PPP authentication interval 24855d 03h 14m 075 Normally on an authenticated PPP link authentication is not only performed at link set up but also at regular intervals during the data transfer You can set this interval using the authenPeriod attribute If you set the authenPeriod attribute to 00000d 00h 00m 00s then authentication is only performed at link set up and not during the data transfer shdsiRouter waninterface ppp routing Default disabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to determine whether IP packets are treated by the bridg ing process or not For more information refer to the configuration attribute shdsIRouter laninterface routing on page 153 shdsIRouter wanlnterface ppp bridgePortlnfo Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to set the bridging attributes of the PPP WAN interface For more information refer to the configuration attribute shdsIRouter laninterface bridgePortln
6. gt gt snmp the attributes concerning SNMP traps E g the configuration attribute trapDestinations gt gt management attributes concerned with the management of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router E g the configuration attribute cms2Address gt gt operatingSystem the operating system attributes E g the performance attribute freeMemory Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 4145 User manual Managing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 4 6 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router attribute overview The reference part of this manual explains all the attributes of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router One chapter describes one group of attributes e chapter 8 describes the configuration attributes chapter 9 describes the status attributes chapter 10 describes the performance attributes chapter 11 describes the alarm attributes 46 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router G Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 47 User manual Step by step configuration 5 Step by step configuration This chapter describes in a step by step method how to perform a basic configuration on Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router First it explains how DIP switch configuration tables and TMA attribute strings should be interpreted You are advised to read this chapter in a sequential manner from the beginning to the end without skip ping any part By doing so your Telindus 1420 SHDSL Rout
7. Computer Bold text you have to enter at the DOS or CLI prompt when it is part of a mix of com puter input and output E g 01003 Edit Configuration gt get sysName sysName Orchid 1003 LAN 01003 Edit Configuration gt Narrow containment tree objects and attributes of a device when they are mentioned in the normal text l e when they are not a part of computer input or output E g Use the sysName attribute in order to references to other parts in the manual E g For more information refer to Chapter xx Technical specifications Blue underline a hyperlink to a web site E g http Awww telindus com Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Preface vii User and reference manual Graphical conventions The following icons are used in this manual Icon Name This icon indicates Remark remarks or useful tips Caution text to be read carefully in order to avoid damage to the device Warning text to be read carefully in order to avoid injury DIP switch a DIP switch or strap table Basic attribute a basic attribute in the containment tree of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Advanced attribute an advanced attribute in the containment tree of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Action an action in the containment tree of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Audience This manual is intended for computer literate people who have a working knowledge of compu
8. User manual Managing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 4 3 Connecting over an IP network To established a connection between TMA and the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router over an IP network proceed as follows Connect the IP network to the network port of your Ha w PC r the LAN connector of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Start TMA In the TMA window either select from the menu bar Connect gt E Device Please specify how to reach the device you wish to connect to Serial or press on the Connect to device button 6 to CTESTN mode m oe The Connect to a device window is being dis i 3 fio 0 11100 or press the short cut key Ctrl N played as in the following figure m oo me o ASS TE Security Specify a password for connecting to this device This field may be left open Password Carcel In the Connect to a device window specify the following Select the option P address and enter the IP address of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router If a password has previously been configured in the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router then also fill in the password field Before you are able to establish a connection over an IP network you have to configure an IP address and a default gateway in the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router You can do this by first connecting TMA to the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router through the auxiliary connector and then configuring an IP address an
9. reached If you only have to reach one remote LAN network from your local Ethernet via this router you may skip the routingTable attribute In that case it is sufficient to define the defaultRoute attribute only Use the configuration attributes defaultRoute and routingTable to configure static routes ra shdsIRouter router defaultRoute Use this attribute to set the default route also called gateway address Default Range structure see below Besides specifying routing entries for specific networks you can also specify a gateway address Pack ets for destinations that do not match one of the routing table entries are sent to this gateway address The defaultRoute structure contains the following elements gateway This is the IP address of the next router that will route all packets for which no specific static or dynamic route is exists in the routing table Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 Whether you can omit the gateway element or not is linked to the following condi tions If the interface element is set you can not omit the gateway element you can omit the gateway element only when using PPP encapsulation 68 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration al C SUUTIS interface This specifies the interface through which the gate Default lt opt gt way can be reached Range enumerated see below
10. subState This is a bit string indicating the following LMI sub states startup This is a transient state at start up It remains in this state if no LMI has been configured wait response This bit is set if the DTE is waiting on a response on a Status Enquiry message usr error This bit is set in case the DTE has not received a response on a Full Status Enquiry message within the given pollinginterval e has received an error message expect poll This bit is set if the DCE is waiting on a response on a Status Enquiry message net error This bit is set in case the DCE has not received a response on a Full Status Enquiry message within the given pollinginterval e has received an error message Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 Reference manual 223 Status attributes Ene beens ESSEE lastError This displays the last error condition reported by LMI Possible values are none protocol error unknown information element seguence error unknown report timer expired invalid report type unsolicited status netTxSegNr This is the sequence number of the last LMI response frame sent towards the net work netRxSeqNr This is the sequence number of the last LMI command frame received from the network netErrors This is the number of errors on LMI commands issued by the network during the last monitoredEvents period userTxSeqNr This is the sequence number of the las
11. Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Annex Index A absolute and relative address ing 204 action what is 43 activating the configuration 117 adding a policy object 110 addressing relative and abso lute 204 alarm attributes 273 configuration 276 general 277 introduction 275 overview 274 alarms general 278 LAN interface 279 line 281 routing 282 WAN interface 280 ARP cache how works the 158 time out 158 what is 158 attribute overview 45 what is 42 attribute action Activate Configuration 150 clearArpCache 219 clearBridgeCache 245 Cold Boot 151 Load Default Configuration 151 Load Saved Configuration 150 resetNAT 265 startPing 264 stopPing 264 attribute alarm alarmInfo 277 alarmLevel 276 alarmMask 276 totalAlarmLevel 277 attribute configuration accessList 155 205 alarmFilter 207 alarmLevel laninterface object 159 line object 171 router object 187 top object 146 waninterface object 162 alarmMask laninterface object 159 line object 171 router object 187 top object 146 waninterface object 162 algorithm 192 alternativeRoutes 175 arpTimeOut 158 authenPeriod 169 authentication 169 autolnstallMode 160 bootFromFlash 146 bridgeAccessList 157 bridgePortlnfo 157 bridgeTimeOut 199 channel 171 cms2Address 204 consoleNoTrafficTimeOut 206 countingPolicy 193 ctriPortProtocol 206 defaultRoute 172 dhcpCheckAddress 187 dhcpDynamic 185 dhcpStatic 184 directedBroadcasts 158
12. Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 161 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdsiRouter wanlnterface priorityPolicy Default lt empty gt Range max 64 characters When you want to activate the priority policy feature of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router you first have to add the priority policy object to the containment tree refer to 5 11 5 Adding a policy object on page 108 What is more the instance value you defined for the priorityPolicy object also has to be entered in this priorityPolicy attribute shdsiRouter wanlnterface trafficPolicy Default lt empty gt Range max 64 characters When you want to activate the traffic policy feature of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router you first have to add the traffic policy object to the containment tree refer to 5 11 5 Adding a policy object on page 108 What is more the instance value you defined for the trafficPolicy object also has to be entered in this trafficPolicy attribute shdsIRouter wanlnterface splitHorizon Default enabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to enable or disable split horizon operation Split horizon operation prevents that routing information exits the interface through which the information was received in the first place This optimises communications among multiple routers particularly when links are broken It also prevents routing loops However with non broadcast networks such as Frame
13. This attribute displays informative and error messages e g Reconfigured Cold Boot The messages table displays maximum 20 messages If you open a TMA session on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router over IP i e not through the auxiliary port then the messages are also sent to the auxiliary port This means that if you open a terminal emu lation session on the auxiliary port you can monitor these messages If you hit the ENTER key the mes sages stop and you get the CLI password prompt shdsIRouter deviceld This attribute displays a unigue code This code is programmed into the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router before it leaves the factory You can use this code for inventory purposes shdsIRouter configurationSaving This attribute indicates when the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is writing its new configuration to the flash memory Possible values are The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is busy writing its configuration to the flash memory During this state do not power down or reboot the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router else the new configuration will be lost The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router has finished writing its configuration to the flash memory CH al CH al Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 91215 Reference manual Status attributes 9 3 LAN interface status attributes shdsIRouter laninterface ipAddress This attribute displays the IP address of the LAN interface It is either configured with the configuration
14. copyright notice ii firmware version described in this v intended audience vii organisation iv properties ii statements iii your feedback vii downloading firmware 301 using TFTP 306 using TMA 302 using TML 304 using TML in boot mode 305 E EMC compliance 314 environmental compliance 314 Ethernet LAN interface specifi cations 311 examples 119 bridging and routing ina network 124 connecting a LAN to the In ternet using NAT and PAT 122 LAN extension over a Frame Relay network 121 LAN extension over a PDH SDH network 120 tunnelling in a network 125 using PAT over PPP with a minimum of official IP addresses 123 Index 323 F feedback vii firmware downloading 301 using TFTP 306 using TMA 302 using TML 304 using TML in boot mode 305 version v Frame Relay basic configuration 58 configuration attributes 164 introduction 7 status attributes 222 troubleshooting 135 G general alarm attributes 277 alarms 278 configuration attributes 146 status attributes 212 getting the configuration with TFTP 291 getting the IP address over a Frame Relay WAN link 289 over a PPP WAN link 288 over the LAN interface 287 group what is 42 H HDLC configuration attributes 170 introduction 9 ICMP message communication prohibited 180 port unreachable 180 TTL exceeded 179 installation and connection pre cautions 21 installing and connecting the device 17 Internet connection an e
15. disabled The IP packets are first passed to the bridging process If necessary IP packets destined for the router itself are passed on to the routing process 60 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration ena a S gateway This is the corresponding IP address of the remote Default 0 0 0 0 router Range up to 255 255 255 255 local This address is used in the response on an Inverse Default 0 0 0 0 ARP request received on the DLCI Range up to 255 255 255 255 The local attribute is optional and only needs to be defined in case secondary IP addresses are used on the Frame Relay WAN interface bridgePortlnfo This sets the bridging attributes of the Frame Relay Default WAN interface Range structure see below The bridgePortlnfo structure contains the following elements Eon Bescon bridging Enables or disables bridg Default disabled ing on the interface Range enabled disabled priority Each port of a bridge has a Pefault 128 unique port identifier The Range 0 255 priority attribute is a part of this port identifier and allows you to change the priority of the port It is taken as the more significant part in pri ority comparisons The other part of the unique port identifier has a fixed relationship to the physical or logical port This assures the uniqueness of the unique port identifier among the ports
16. e 14 3 Downloading firmware using TML in boot mode on page 305 14 4 Downloading firmware using TFTP on page 306 302 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 14 Reference manual Downloading firmware 14 1 Downloading firmware using TMA To download firmware to the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router using TMA proceed as follows Establish a link between TMA and the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router either over a serial or an IP link Refer to 4 Managing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router on page 37 Downloading firmware over an IP link is only possible when the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is equipped with two flash memory banks Check the status attribute shdslRouter flashVersions to find out how many flash banks your Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router con In the TMA window select Tools Download In case you made e an IP connection skip this step Password Files Options aserial connection select the Options tab in Mies km Sateen the TMA Download window Then do the following Serial port comi Set the initial transfer speed to 9600 bps Ifyou set the maximum transfer speed to 115200 bps the actual transfer speed will be negotiated between 9600 bps and 115200 bps If your Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is equipped with one flash bank only tick the Reboot device box Check the status attribute shdsIRouter flashVersions to find out how many flash banks your Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router contains In the TMA Dow
17. secret Enter here the CHAP secret of the remote router Default lt empty gt If the remote router is a Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Range max 64 characters then the secret element should correspond with the remote Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router its sysSecret attribute 178 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdsIRouter router helperProtocols Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to define the TCP and UDP port numbers for which broad cast forwarding is reguired Use this attribute if you have specified IP addresses for one ofthe interfaces in the ipHelpers attribute refer to the configuration attribute shdslRouter laninterface ipHelpers on page 159 If the helperProtocols table is empty default then address substitution is applied for the following proto cols Time Server IEN 116 Host Name Server Domain Name Server TACACS database service Boot Protocol BootP DHCP server NetBIOS Name Server NetBIOS Datagram Server Specifying at least one value in the helperProtocols table clears the default helper list automatically In that case if you want that for instance NetBios Datagram Server broadcast is forwarded you have to specify port number 138 again For BootP DHCP broadcast packets the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is also a BootP DHCP Relay Agent If the protocol is selected then the
18. 15 of a route is incremented For more information on the metric element refer to the configuration attribute shdslRouter lanInterface metric on page 153 This modifies the RIP Default disabled behaviour of the interface Range enumerated see below By default RIP updates are nor transmitted nor received on this interface For more information on the mode ele ment refer to the configuration attribute shdsIRouter lanin terface ripMode on page 154 routing This determines whether IP packets are treated by the Defayitenabled bridging process or not Range enabled disabled For more information refer to the configuration attribute shdsIRouter laninterface rout ing on page 153 190 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes ra shdsIRouter router tunnels I2tpTunnels I2tp Default Range structure see below Use the I2tp structure in the I2tpTunnels table to configure the L2TP properties of the tunnel The I2tp structure contains the following elements omn pe O locallpAddress This is an official IP address which serves as starting Default lt Opt gt point of the L2TP connection Range up to 255 255 255 255 remotelpAddress This is an official IP address which serves as end Default lt Opt gt point of the L2TP connection Range up to 255 255 255 255 Both locallpAddress and remotelpAddress toget
19. However it does not store it in non volatile memory 288 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 13 3 Getting the IP address over a PPP WAN link The figure below shows the following set up e a Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router A is connected over a line to modem Y modem Y its serial interface is connected to a remote router Z alternatively modem Y and the remote router Z can be replaced by another Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router the protocol used between the two routers is PPP Can you give me an IP address configured remote router non configured Router Here is your IP address The IP address is obtained as follows TT per OOOO In case onthe WAN interface no ipAddress is configured i e still at its default value AND e the configuration attribute autolnstallMode is set to unnumbered and on the LAN interface no ipAddress or ipNetMask is configured i e still at their default value OR any other value then the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router A requests an IP address during the IPCP handshake Ifthe remote router Z supports the IPCP option IP address then it sends an IP address to the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router A If the remote router Z is also a Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router then it looks in its rout ing table and replies with the gateway address of the first route which passes t
20. KT SN a a e a l bootFile This is the location of the boot file Default lt empty gt Range max 128 characters hostName This is the name of the client Default lt empty gt Because the DHCP server can not give the same Range max 20 characters name to all clients of this IP address range a number is added to the host name from the second IP address onwards The number goes up to 99 Example Suppose the host name is Telindus In that case the name for the start IP address is Telindus for the second IP address Telindus1 and so on domainName This is the name the client should use when resolving Default lt empty gt hostnames via the Domain Name System DNS Range max 20 characters netbiosNameServer This is the IP address of the NetBios server Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 netbiosNodeType Use this element to configure the client as described Defauit lt Opt gt in RFC 1001 1002 Range enumerated see below The netbiosNodeType element has the following values no node B node P node M node H node DHCP server reaction on a BootP request The DHCP server reacts on a BootP request as follows the source MAC address of the incoming BootP request packet is compared with the MAC addresses that have been entered in the dhcpStatic table Then there are two possibilities If the source MAC address corresponds with a MAC address in the dhcpSta
21. Selecting unchanged leaves the TOS field value as it is priority This is the destination queue for a packet matching an entry in the trafficShaping table Default Aueue1 Range enumerated see below The priority element has the following values Queue1 Queue2 Queue3 Aueue4 Aueue5 lowDelayQueue Start and end values Except for the ipProtocol newTosValue and priority elements it is possible to specify ranges using the start and end values There are two special cases e A start value is entered but no end value gt an exact match is needed for the start value Neither a start nor an end value is entered the field is not checked shdsiRouter router trafficPolicy tos2QueueMapping In case you have set the shdsIRouter router trafficPolicy method attribute to tosMapped then use the tos2QueueMapping table to specify which data has to be redirected to which queue The tos2QueueMapping table contains the following elements a 1 NIE E startTos endTos Traffic that has a Type Of Service field value within the specified range is redirected to the specified gueue Default lt empty gt Range table see below Default 0 start 255 end Range 0 255 targetAueue This isthe destination gueue for a packet matching an entry in the tos2QueueMapping table Default Aueue1 Range enumerated see below The targetAueue element has the fo
22. Ta shdsIRouter waninterface frameRelay Imi This attribute gives a complete LMI performance overview The Imi structure contains the following elements ee eee inStatusEnquiry This is the number of Status Enquiries received from the network inStatus This is the number of Status Reports received from the network inStatusUpdate This is the number of unsolicited Status Updates received from the network outStatusEnquiry This is the number of Status Enquiries sent to the network outStatus This is the number of Status Reports sent to the network outStatusUpdate This is the number of unsolicited Status Updates sent to the network netPollNotRcvd This is the number of times the expectedPolllnterval expired without an incoming sta tus enquiry userNoResponse This is the number of times a response was not received Revd userBadResponses This is the number of times an invalid response was received Revd Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual Performance attributes ra shdslRouter wanlnterface frameRelay dlciTable This attribute lists the complete performance information of all known DLCIs The diciTable table contains the following elements A A OS DA dlci This is the DLCI identification number inFecn This is the number of frames received from the network indicating forward conges tion and this since the virtual circuit was created inBecn This is the numbe
23. Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Troubleshooting Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 141 Reference manual Reference manual 142 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 143 Reference manual Configuration attributes 8 Configuration attributes This chapter discusses the configuration attributes of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this chapter 8 1 Configuration attribute overview on page 144 8 2 General configuration attributes on page 146 8 3 LAN interface configuration attributes on page 152 8 4 WAN interface configuration attributes on page 160 8 5 WAN encapsulation configuration attributes on page 163 8 6 Line configuration attributes on page 171 8 7 Routing configuration attributes on page 172 8 8 L2TP tunnel configuration attributes on page 188 8 9 Priority policy configuration attributes on page 192 8 10 Traffic policy configuration attributes on page 194 8 11 Bridging configuration attributes on page 198 8 12 SNMP proxy configuration attributes on page 202 8 13 Management configuration attributes on page 204 144 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes 8 1 Configuration attribute overview gt shdsIRouter l gt gt wanlnterface sysName ipAddress sysContact ipNetMask sysLocation secondarylpAddresses bootFromFlash autolnstallMode
24. Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes 173 Mae a SEE metric This determines with how much the metric parameter Defauit 1 of a route is incremented Range 1 15 If two routes exist with the same preference then the route with the lowest metric value is chosen This element is only important when combining static routes and RIP routes For more information on the metric element refer to the configuration attribute shd slRouter laninterface metric on page 153 Deducing the interface element value If you do not specify a value for the interface element then this value is deduced from the setting of the gateway element Depending on the presence of an IP address on the WAN interface the deduction is done as follows not present In this case the interface element value is deduced as follows If the gateway address then the interface ele ment is set to belongs to the Ethernet interface subnet does not belong to the Ethernet interface subnet present In this case the interface element value is deduced as follows If the gateway address then se belongs to the Ethernet interface subnet the interface element is set to lan belongs to the serial interface subnet the interface element is set to wan neither belongs to the Ethernet interface subnet the route is discarded nor to the serial interface subnet i e not used 17
25. The propagation of Configuration BDPUs When a bridged network is in a stable condition switches continue to send Configuration BPDUs to its neighbouring bridges at regular intervals Configuration BPDUs are transmitted down the spanning tree from designated ports to root ports If a Configuration BPDU is not received by the root port of a bridge within a predefined time interval for example because a bridge along the path has dropped out the port enters the listening state to re determine a stable path Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 97 User manual Step by step configuration 5 9 6 Spanning Tree behaviour The following are some examples of how Spanning Tree behaves when certain events occur in your net work Bridging loops Bridges connected in a LAN must segment 1 detect potential bridge loops They must then remove these loops by E blocking the appropriate ports to other bridges Bridge A This is illustrated in the following fig segment 2 Bridge B ure l l An alternate path has been estab EAA iaa l lished by connecting Bridge B in par Bridge C allel with Bridges A and C This also i creates a potential bridge loop How segment 3 ever by using the Spanning Tree Algorithm Bridge B breaks the loop and blocks its path to segment 3 Bridge failure Bridges connected in a LAN must segment 1 also detect bridge failure They must then establish an alternative path Should the root bridge fail also
26. attribute ipAddress or automatically retrieved with BootP shdsiRouter laninterface ipNetMask This attribute displays the IP subnet mask of the LAN interface It is either configured with the configu ration attribute ipNetMask or automatically retrieved with BootP shdsiRouter laninterface secondarylpAddresses This attribute displays the secondary IP addresses as you configured them with the configuration attribute secondarylpAddresses shdslRouter laninterface ifDescr This attribute is the interface description This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter shdsiRouter laninterface ifType This attribute is the interface type This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter shdsiRouter laninterface ifSpeed This attribute displays the LAN interface speed in bits per second bps e g 10000000 shdsIRouter laninterface ifMtu This attribute displays the interface its Maximum Transfer Unit i e the maximum number of bytes that one packet can contain on this interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter A The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router never fragments packets since both its LAN and WAN interfaces have the same MTU value being 1520 216 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 Reference manual Status attributes ra shdslRouter laninterface ifOperStatus This attribute displays the current operation status of the LAN interface Possible values are The LAN interface is up data transfer is possible The LAN interface is down
27. data transfer is not possible ra shdsiRouter laninterface ifLastChange This attribute shows the system up time on the moment the interface entered its current operation state l e the moment the value of the ifOperStatus status attribute changes from up to down or vice versa the system up time value is written into the ifLastChange status attribute This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra shdslRouter laninterface macAddress This attribute displays the MAC address of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router its LAN interface e g 00 C0 89 00 8E 23 The LAN interface has been allocated a fixed Ethernet address also called MAC Medium Access Con trol address The MAC address is globally unique and can not be modified It is a 6 byte code repre sented in hexadecimal format Each byte in the code is separated by a colon For more information on the MAC address refer to the configuration attribute shdsIRouter laninterface arpTi meOut on page 158 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 217 Reference manual Status attributes shdslRouter laninterface arpCache This attribute displays all the MAC address IP address pairs from ARP requests and replies received on the LAN interface For more information on the ARP cache refer to the configuration attribute shd slRouter lanInterface arpTimeOut on page 158 The arpCache table contains the following elements ee macAddress This is the corresponding MAC address e g 00 C0 89 00 0
28. diciTable 164 dropPrecedence 195 encapsulation 162 extendedAccessList 156 helperProtocols 178 ipAddress 152 ipAddress loopback 207 ipHelpers 159 ipNetMask 152 I2tpTunnels 188 lanWanStatusCoupling 159 linkMonitoring 168 Imi 166 lowdelayQuotum 193 method 194 metric 153 mib2Traps 203 natAddresses 183 natGateways 183 natTcpSockets 183 natTcpSocketTimeOut 183 natUdpSockets 183 natUdpSocketTimeOut 183 Index 321 patAddress 181 portTranslations 181 pppSecretTable 177 priorityPolicy 161 queueConfigurations 193 retrain 171 rip2Authentication 154 ripMode 154 rip Updatelnterval 176 ripv2SecretTable 176 routing 153 routingProtocol 175 routingTable 174 secundarylpAddresses 152 security 147 sendAdminUnreachable 180 sendicmpRedirect 159 sendPortUnreachable 180 sendTtlExceeded 179 servicesAvailable 182 snmp 206 spanningTree 198 speed 171 splitHorizon 161 sysContact 146 sysLocation 146 sysName 146 sysSecret 177 telnet 206 tftp 206 tos2QueueMapping 197 trafficPolicy 161 trafficShaping 196 trapDestinations 202 attribute performance bridgeAccessList 253 bridgeCache 267 bridgeDiscards 267 bridgeFloods 267 cliSessionCount 268 cllmInFrames 257 cms2SessionCount 268 currUsedProcPower 270 d7Line 258 d7LineParameters 260 d7Performance 260 dlciTable 257 freeBlockCount 270 freeDataBuffers 270 freeMemory 271 h24Line 258 h24LineParameters 260 h24Performance 254 260 h2Line 258 h2LineParameters 259 h2Performanc
29. disabled Use this attribute to enable or disable the sending of ICMP communication prohibited messages The ICMP message communication prohibited If the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router receives an IP packet that is destined for a prohibited destination because this destination is defined in the access list or extended access list then it sends an ICMP communication prohibited message to the originator of the packet With this attribute you can define whether you want the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router to send ICMP packets or not The sendPortUnreachable attribute has the following values enabled The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router sends Communication administratively prohib ited by filtering message Destination host unreachable messages disabled The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router does not send ICMP messages Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 181 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdsiRouter router patAddress Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 Use this attribute to define the Port Address Translation address The PAT address is always an official IP address Entering an address different from the default value 0 0 0 0 automatically enables PAT For more information on PAT refer to 5 8 Configuring NAT and PAT on page 77 shdsIRouter router portTranslations Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to define specific port n
30. macAddress This is the MAC address of the client leaseTime This is the remaining lease time 236 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 Reference manual Status attributes ra shdsIRouter router dhcpStatistics This attribute contains the statistics of all IP address ranges that have been specified in the configuration attribute dhcpDynamic The dhcpStatistics table contains the following elements en ee startRange Displays the IP start address of an IP address range endRange Displays the IP end address of an IP address range free For the corresponding IP address range this displays the number of IP addresses that are still free lease For the corresponding IP address range this displays the number of IP addresses that are leased hold For the corresponding IP address range this displays the number of IP addresses that are on hold l A During power down ofthe DHCP server some leased IP addresses can still be active Because the duration of the power down can not be known all timer information about lease and hold time becomes meaningless Therefore the DHCP server incorporated in the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router sends a ping to all leased addresses after a warm boot When the client responds to this ping the DHCP server resets all timers to their default value and keeps the lease with this client Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 237 Reference manual Status attributes 9 8 L2TP tunnel s
31. the attribute name is ipAddress e this attribute is located in the sub object laninterface e this sub object is located in the top object shdsIRouter the default value of a configuration attribute Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 51 User manual Step by step configuration 5 2 Loading the default configuration If you install the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router for the first time all configuration attributes are set to their default value If the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router has already been configured a number of times and you want to reconfigure it starting from scratch it might be best to load the default configuration The following gives an overview of this section e 5 2 1 Loading the default configuration with a DIP switch on page 52 e 5 2 2 Loading the default configuration with TMA on page 53 52 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration 5 2 1 Loading the default configuration with a DIP switch The following procedure shows how to load the default configuration using the Load Default Configura tion DIP switch on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router PCB Disconnect the power supply and open the housing as described in 3 4 Changing DIP switch and strap settings on page 35 Set DIP switch bank DS1 position 2 to off To locate this DIP switch bank refer to 3 DIP switches and straps of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router on page 31 Replace the cover without fastening the
32. with the exception of Configuration BPDUs are not accepted or transmitted by the port when it is in the blocking state The port can be said to be in stand by An elementary example of a Spanning Tree topology is given in the figure below segment 1 DP DF Bridge A BP Bridge B I RP l EA I I I DP Bridge C I segment 3 RP Root Port DP Designated Port BP Blocking Port segment 2 96 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration What is a BPDU To establish a stable path each bridge sends Configuration Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs to its neighbouring bridges These Configuration BPDU messages contain information about the spanning tree topology The contents ofthese frames only changes when the bridged network topology changes or has not been established Each Configuration BPDU contains the following minimal information The unique bridge identifier of the bridge that the transmitting bridge believes to be the root bridge The cost of the path to the root from the transmitting port The unique port identifier of the transmitting port When a bridge transmits a BPDU frame all bridges connected to the LAN on which the frame is trans mitted receive the BPDU When a bridge receives a BPDU it does not forward the frame Instead it uses the information in the frame to e calculate a BPDU initiate a BPDU transmission if the topology changes
33. DLCI A DLCl or Data Link Connection Identifiers is a logical channel through which the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router can connect to a remote router What is more the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router can connect to multiple remote routers via different DLCls using a single WAN interface The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router supports a maximum of 5 DLCls The following figure gives an example of a local Ethernet segment connected to three different networks through three different DLCls For each DLCI there is a corresponding router 192 168 100 2 DLCI 19 92 168 100 4 DLCI 21 Each DLCI connects to one remote router Through LMI Full Status Enquiry messages the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router can learn its active and inactive DLCls If the Frame Relay network also supports the Inverse ARP protocol the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router can learn the IP address of the correspond ing router for each DLCI If however neither LMI nor Inverse ARP is supported by the Frame Relay network then you can define which DLCI number corresponds with which remote router in the diciTable This is also called static routing on a WAN The following screenshot shows the dlciTable of the set up depicted in the figure above diciTable 192 168 100 2 b1 b 2 20 192 168 100 3 b3 21 192 168 100 4 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 59 User manual Step by step configuration shdslRouter wanInterface frameRelay diciTable Default lt empty gt Range
34. DOS windows and press the ENTER key If you press the ENTER key the firmware download begins If you used the v option together with the TML command a graphical bar shows the download progress Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 14 305 Reference manual Downloading firmware 14 3 Downloading firmware using TML in boot mode When a firmware download has failed or when a flash memory error occurs it may be possible that the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router becomes inaccessible to TMA In that case new software can still be downloaded by forcing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router in boot mode Do this by means of the start up mode DIP switch start up mode Start up from flash memory Start up in boot mode To download firmware to a Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router in boot mode proceed as follows Disconnect the power supply and open the housing as described in 3 4 Changing DIP switch and strap settings on page 35 Set DIP switch bank DS1 position 1 to off To locate this DIP switch bank refer to 3 DIP switches and straps of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router on page 31 Replace the cover without fastening the screws and reconnect the power supply gt The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is now in boot mode Now proceed as explained in the previous section 14 2 Downloading firmware using TML on page 304 When the download is finished disconnect the power supply and open the housing again Reset DIP swit
35. LAN interface status attributes on page 215 The attribute ifOperStatus is also present on the LAN interface but behaves somewhat differently on the WAN interface ra shdsiRouter laninterface ifOperStatus This attribute displays the current operation status of the WAN interface Possible values are The WAN interface is up data transfer is possible The following table shows you in which case the value of the ifOperStatus attribute is up Protocol The ifOperStatus attribute is up i e the alarm wanlnterface alarminfo linkDown off in case Frame Relay LMI is up PPP LCP is open The WAN interface is down data transfer is not possible Important remarks e Whether the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is configured in bridging or routing has no effect on the value of the attributes shdslRouter wanlnterface ifOperStatus Status and shdslRouter wanlnterface alarmlnfo link Down Alarms Incase of Frame Relay if the configuration attribute element shdslRouter wanlnterface frameRelay Imi type is set to noLmiConfigured then the value of the attribute shdslRouter wanInterface frameRelay Imi state Status is always up However the other conditions as stated in the table above remain Incase of PPP if the configuration attribute element shdslRouter wanlnterface ppp linkMonitoring operation is set to disabled then it is possible that the ifOperStatus value does not go down even if the link quality is too bad for a p
36. Router against unauthorised access in case the last user did not close his session ra shdslRouter management ctriPortProtocol Default console Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to define what purpose the auxiliary connector of the Tel indus 1420 SHDSL Router has to serve The ctrlPortProtocol attribute has the following values management Select this value if you want to connect the auxiliary connector of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router to e the Orchid 1003 LAN for management purposes e the auxiliary connector of another Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router using a crossed cable i e they are connected back to back in order to create an extended management link For more information on extended management links refer to What is relative and absolute addressing on page 204 When connecting the auxiliary connector of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router to a COM port of your computer you can still open a TMA session on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router You can however not open a CLI or ATWIN session console Select this value if you want to connect the auxiliary connector of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router to a COM port of your computer in order to manage the Tel indus 1420 SHDSL Router using TMA CLI or ATWIN Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 207 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdsIRouter management alarmFilter Default 0 Range 0 50000 Use this attribute to select
37. SHDSL Router There are always minimum two fixed sessions active Connecting with TMA CLI the Web Interface etc opens additional sessions This is explained in the following table Session count Purpose 1 fixed session A fixed session for the auxiliary control port 1 fixed session A fixed session for Web Interface 1 session When connecting with TMA CLI or starting a CLI session 1 session When connecting with the Web Interface Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 269 Reference manual Performance attributes kal shdsIRouter management tcpSessionCount This attribute displays the number of TCP sessions that are currently active on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The following table shows when a TCP session opens Session count Purpose 1 session When connecting with Telnet 1 session When connecting with the Web Interface 270 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Performance attributes 10 10 Operating system performance attributes shdsiRouter operatingSystem currUsedProcPower This attribute displays the amount of processing power used during the last 650 milliseconds expressed as a percentage of the total available processing power shdsiRouter operatingSystem usedProcPower This attribute lists the used processing power for the 11 most recent 30 seconds intervals The process ing power is expressed as a percentage of the total processing powe
38. SHDSL Router declares the WAN link down Example Default 4 Range 1 30 Suppose failsPermitted is set to 10 If on 10 consecutive echo requests no reply is given then the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router declares the WAN link down and the PPP handshake is started again Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router User manual Chapter 5 65 Step by step configuration shdsIRouter wanlnterface ppp authentication Default disabled Range chap disabled Use this attribute to enable or disable CHAP authentication on the PPP link The authentication attribute has the following values disabled Authentication is disabled chap This side of the link requests a CHAP authentication from the remote router What is CHAP authentication The Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP is a standardised authentication protocol in compliance with RFC 1994 over PPP links The password is hashed before sending it over the link The used hashing algorithm is MD5 CHAP authentication over a link can be performed in one direction or in both directions CHAP authentication in one direc tion The figure shows CHAP authentica tion in one direction Router A is called the authenticator and the router B is called the peer Router A is configured for CHAP authentication and the router B is not Router A authenticates after building its LCP layer and prior to building the IPCP layer If the authenticati
39. Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router will write the IP address of its Ethernet interface in the BootP or DHCP gateway field and increment the hops field in addition to the address substitution Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 179 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdsiRouter router sendTtlExceeded Default enabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to enable or disable the sending of ICMP TTL exceeded messages What is Time To Live TTL Each IP packet has a Time To Live TTL value in its header Each device that sends an IP packet sets this parameter at some fixed or predefined value When the packet enters a router the router decre ments the TTL value If a router finds a value 0 after decrementing the TTL it discards the packet This because a value 0 means the packet has passed too many routers Probably the packet is looping between a number of routers This mechanism avoids that routers with configuration errors bring down a complete network The ICMP message TTL exceeded If a router discards a packet because its TTL is exceeded it normally sends an ICMP TTL exceeded message to the originator of the packet With the sendTtlExceeded attribute you can define whether you want the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router to send such ICMP messages or not The sendTtlExceeded attribute has the following values enabled The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router sends ICMP destination unreachable reason TT
40. The tunnel either is established or is torn down if an authorisation failure is detected established The control connection is established An established connection may be terminated by either a local condition or the receipt of a Stop Control Connection Notification The session then returns to the idle state 240 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 Reference manual Status attributes L2TP status call states The states associated with the LNS or LAC incoming or outgoing calls are idle No data is exchanged over the tunnel waitTunnel This isthe state in which is waited either for the control connection to be opened e or for verification that the tunnel is already open Once an indication is received that the tunnel has was opened session control messages may be exchanged The first of these is the Incoming Call Request waitReply This is the state where an Incoming or Outgoing Call Reply message is awaited If an Incoming or Outgoing Call Reply message is received an incoming or Outgoing Call Connected message is sent and the session moves to the established state waitConnect This is the state where an Incoming or Outgoing Call Connected message is awaited If an Incoming or Outgoing Call Connected message is received the call was successful and the session moves to the established state established Data is exchanged over the tunnel The session is terminated when receiving or sending a
41. Tree topology changes on the WAN interface On the WAN interface topologyChangeDetection has to be configured for each encapsulation protocol sep arately Encapsulation Attribute location In case of Frame Relay encapsulation topologyChangeDetection has to be set for each DLCI Frame Relay shdsIRouter wanlnterface frameRelay dlciTable bridgePortlnfo topologyChangeDetection shdsIRouter wanlnterface ppp bridgePortlnfo topologyChangeDetection shdsIRouter wanlinterface hdlc bridgePortlnfo topologyChangeDetection 102 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration 5 10 Configuring tunnelling This section explains how you can configure the Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol L2TP on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router First it introduces L2TP and explains some L2TP terminology The following gives an overview of this section 5 10 1 How does the Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol work on page 105 e 5 10 2 L2TP terminology on page 106 e 5 10 3 Setting up a tunnel on page 107 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 103 User manual Step by step configuration 5 10 1 How does the Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol work Suppose a packet coming from the LAN has a destination address for a network that is accessible through a tunnel The following happens A e EPEE The packet 9088 AEGU GAME routing degision process If IP from LAN the result of this decision is a route which uses the tunnel interfa
42. a new root bridge must be selected Bigs A lt dropout SS A bridge failure is illustrated in the fol segment 2 Bridge B lowing figure If Bridge A fails the Spanning Tree ae by Algorithm must be capable of activat Bridge C ing an alternative path such as Bridge B Network extension Bridges connected in a LAN must also detect topology changes They must adapt to these changes segment 1 A topology change is illustrated in the Bridge A following figure lt dropout segment 2 Bridge B I I blocked by I bridge B I If the network is extended by adding Bridge D the Spanning Tree Algo rithm must be capable of adapting automatically to the new topology This means that Bridge B stops loop ing by blocking the path to segment 3 segment 3 98 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration 5 9 7 Whatis Spanning Tree priority and cost Consider the following Spanning Tree Topology ET DP RP A Sa RP Root Port DP Designated Port By means ofthe example above the following table explains the terms bridge priority port priority and port or path cost bridge priority In the example above Bridge A is selected as the root bridge This because the bridge priority of all the bridges is set to the default value 32768 and Bridge A has the lowest MAC address However due to traffic patterns or link types Bridge A might not be th
43. allocated port number for number replacement on the outgoing traffic local network Does the PAT address match the IP address of the WAN interface and is this port number known by the router its protocol stack TMA Telnet SNMP TFTP The router treats the packet as a packet destined for him Discard the packet 1 Numbered mode means that each WAN interface has an IP address In that case you need the single official IP address for your WAN interface Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 83 User manual Step by step configuration 5 8 4 Configuring PAT Use the following attributes to configure PAT shdsiRouter router patAddress Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 Use this attribute to define the Port Address Translation address The PAT address is always an official IP address Entering an address different from the default value 0 0 0 0 automatically enables PAT In the network depicted in Example of a network topology for Internet connection on page 82 assign the IP address 195 7 12 22 to the PAT address In this case itis the same address as on your WAN inter face shdsiRouter router natGateways Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to define the gateway addresses from routes on which NAT or PAT should be applied If you are connected over a leased line to the ISP then this table should contain only on
44. are exchanged between LAC and LNS pairs operating in band within the tunnel protocol Control messages govern aspects of the tunnel and sessions within the tunnel Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 105 User manual Step by step configuration 5 10 3 Setting up a tunnel shdsIRouter router tunnels I2tpTunnels Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to configure the Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol tunnels you want to setup The I2tpTunnels table contains the following elements KT Beeson This is the name of the tunnel Default lt empty gt Range max 64 characters The tunnel name is used in status and performance information to distinguish the different tunnels from one another adminStatus This activates up or deactivates the tunnel down Default down Range up down Use this structure to assign IP addresses to the tunnel For more information refer to shdslRouter router tunnels I2tpTunnels ip on page 189 bridging Use this structure to configure the bridging feature in the tunnel For more informa tion refer to the configuration attribute shdsIRouter laninterface bridgePortlnfo on page 157 When bridging is enabled on a tunnel interface the tunnel acts exactly as a bridge port for a physical PPP connection Use this structure to configure the L2TP properties of the tunnel For more infor mation refer to shdsIRouter router tunnel
45. attribute to define the time out for UDP sessions that are not closed ange ee F ja Ka by the application Such sessions whether PAT or NAT is in use remain active for 3 minutes by default Only decrease this attribute if some UDP applications do not close properly filling up the available translation sessions shdsIRouter router natTcpSockets Default 1024 Range 500 4500 Use this attribute to set the maximum number of TCP session that may be used simultaneously for address translation shdslRouter router natUdpSockets Default 1024 Range 500 4500 Use this attribute to set the maximum number of UDP session that may be used simultaneously for address translation 184 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 8 Configuration attributes ra shdslRouter router dhcpStatic Use this attribute to assign a fixed IP address to a client its MAC address and this for an infinite time Default lt empty gt Range table see below The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router supports the DHCP server protocol This attribute and the following two attributes describe the configuration parameters to customise the DHCP server behaviour The dhcpStatic table contains the following elements aa Ea ipAddress This assigns an IP address to a certain client This cli D
46. bridge This informa tion is conveyed by the root bridge to ensure that each bridge in the bridged LAN has a consistent value against which to test the age of stored configuration infor mation Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 Reference manual Status attributes Ls a helloTime This is the interval between the generation of Configuration BPDUs by the root bridge The helloTime element displays the value as it is set by the root bridge This attribute is not directly used by the Spanning Tree algorithm but it is conveyed by the root bridge to facilitate the monitoring of protocol performance by the management sys tem forwardDelay This is the time out value to be used by all bridges in the bridged LAN for abridge port applies to move from listening state to learning state or from learn ing state to forwarding state time out or ageing for purging MAC addresses from the bridge cache in case a topology change is detected The forwardDelay element displays the value as it is set by the root bridge This infor mation is conveyed by the root bridge to ensure that each bridge in the bridged LAN has a consistent value for the forward delay timer topologyChange This is a Boolean value 0 or 1 to report e fora bridge that is not a root bridge whether or not the most recently accepted Configuration BPDU indicates a change in the active topology e for the root bridge whether or not a change in topolog
47. displays the auto value until the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Routers have mutually decided who will be the LAC and who the LNS controlState This displays the states associated with the LNS or LAC control connection estab lishment For more information refer to L2TP status control states on page 239 callState This displays the states associated with the LNS or LAC incoming or outgoing calls For more information refer to L2TP status call states on page 240 deliveryState This displays the states associated with the LNS or LAC packet delivery For more information refer to L2TP status delivery states on page 241 authenState This displays the states associated with the LNS or LAC authentication For more information refer to L2TP status authentication states on page 242 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 239 Reference manual Status attributes L2TP status control states The states associated with the LNS or LAC for control connection establishment are No control connection is present Both initiator and recipient start from this state An initiator transmits a Start Control Connection Request while a recipient remains in the idle state until receiving a Start Control Connection Request waitCtlReply This is the state where a Start Control Connection Reply is awaited waitCtIConn This is the state where a Start Control Connection Connected is awaited Upon receipt the challenge response is checked
48. e short term excessive traffic long term excessive traffic short term equipment failure long term equipment failure e short term maintenance action long term maintenance action e short term unknown cause long term unknown cause unknown cause 226 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 Reference manual Status attributes 9 5 2 PPP status attributes ra shdsIRouter laninterface ppp icpState This attribute reflects the status of the LCP Link Control Protocol protocol Possible values are Initial LCP handshake has not started yet Starting Closed These values correspond with the transient states in the LCP state diagram Stopped Closing Stopping Reg Sent The local side ofthe PPP link has sent an LCP reguest The remote side did not answer yet Ack Revd The local side of the PPP link has received an LCP acknowledge from the remote side This is a transient state Ack Sent The local side of the PPP link has acknowledged the LCP request from the remote side Opened The LCP handshake succeeded ra shdslRouter laninterface ppp ipcpState This attribute reflects the status of the IPCP Internet Protocol Control Protocol protocol The possible values are the same as those of shdslRouter laninterface ppp IcpState ra shdsIRouter laninterface ppp bcpState This attribute reflects the status ofthe BCP Bridging Control Protocol protocol The possible
49. e 9 2 General status attributes on page 212 e 9 3 LAN interface status attributes on page 215 9 4 WAN interface status attributes on page 220 e 9 5 WAN encapsulation status attributes on page 221 9 6 Line status attributes on page 232 9 7 Routing status attributes on page 233 e 9 8 L2TP tunnel status attributes on page 237 9 9 Bridging status attributes on page 243 e 9 10 Management status attributes on page 246 9 11 Operating system status attributes on page 247 210 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual 9 1 Status attribute overview Chapter 9 Status attributes gt shdsIRouter gt gt gt ppp sysDescr lepState sysObjectID ipcpState sysUpTime bepState sysServices lepMyOptions flash1Version lepHisOptions flash2Version ipcpMyOptions activeFlash ipcpHisOptions bootVersion bcpMyOptions flashVersions bcpHisOptions messages myAuthenState deviceld hisAuthenState configurationSaving bridgePortStatus gt gt lanInterface gt gt gt hdlc ipAddress bridgePortStatus ipNetMask secondarylpAddresses gt gt gt line ifDescr ifDescr ifType ifType ifSpeed ifSpeed ifMtu ifOperStatus ifOperStatus ifLastChange gt gt gt gt linePair 1 macAddress timeSinceLastRetrain arpCache status ipAdEntBcastAddr lineAttenuation ipAdEntReasmMaxSize noiseMargin bridgePortStatus Action clearArpCache gt gt router routingTable gt gt waninterface natAddresses ipAddress dhcpBin
50. ed altre di Direttivo 1999 5 EC ME To ROLpov n Telindus SHAMVEL OTL AVTO TO Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router ELVOAL ovuuopbovuevo ue TLC BaorkeC anavrnoe kor ue TLC VTOAOUTES oyetikel StaTAEELT THC o nytaC 1999 5 EC iv Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Preface User and refe rence manual Organisation of this manual This manual contains the following main parts This part shows you how to install and connect the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router It also contains the basic configuration information User manual Reference manual gives more detailed information on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router It con tains a complete description for look up purposes Annexes User manual The following gives additional information table gives an overview of the user manual Chapter This chapter introduces the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router explains how to install and connect the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router It also describes the front panel LED indicators shows the position ofthe DIP switches and straps on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router motherboard and reveals their function describes how to start a Telindus Maintenance Application TMA session on the Telin dus 1420 SHDSL Router Further it introduces the management attributes of the Telin dus 1420 SHDSL Router teaches you the basics to configure the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router presents some practical examples of Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router con
51. given in 5 9 3 What is Spanning Tree on page 93 When using Frame Relay encapsulation on the WAN interface together with the Spanning Tree protocol every DLCI is considered as a separate bridge port Each DLCI link is than considered as a special kind of LAN with only both end points con nected bridgePriority The bridge its MAC address together with the Default 32768 bridgePriority element form a unique bridge identifier Range 0 65535 This identifier is used to determine which bridge becomes the root bridge The bridge with the lowest bridgePriority value becomes the root bridge If two bridges have the same bridgePriority value then the bridge with the lowest MAC address becomes the root bridge Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual Lae 172 SSNNISUKAA bridgeMaxAge This changes the time the bridge retains bridging information before discarding it Chapter 8 Configuration attributes Default 00000d 00h 00m 20s Range 00000d 00h 00m 06s 00000d 00h 00m 40s bridgeHelloTime The root bridge regularly sends Configuration BPDUs also called Hello messages This element changes the Hello message interval Default 00000d 00h 00m 02s Range 00000d 00h 00m 01s 00000d 00h 00m 10s bridgeForwardDelay This changes e the delay a bridge port applies to move from listen ing state to learning state or from learning state to forwarding state For more information on the
52. no valid answer is received the router alternatively repeats both reguests up to four times not known the procedure described above is executed with the file name hostname replaced by the concatenation of the decimal repre sentation for each byte in the IP address with leading zeroes and without dots in between the bytes Example a router with IP address 192 168 100 1 requests the file 192168100001 cms or 192168100001 cli If the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router received a valid configuration file then it stores the configuration and possibly reboots Else it restarts with phase 1 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 293 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The following figure illustrates the procedure as described in the table above It shows the procedure over a WAN link The IP address of the router is 192 168 100 1 and its hostname is his name In this example the DNS server and TFTP server are on different machines However in reality these two serv ices often reside on the same machine IP helpers e 195 7 12 251 e 195 7 12 252 helper protocols e DNS 53 e TFTP 69 Telindus Router with WAN IP address 192 168 100 1 central router DNS server JI with IP address 195 7 12 251 Sa DNS request broadcast DNS unicast request DNS reply with hostname his_name damain topleveldomain TFTP server with IP address 195 7 12 252 se
53. number of octets bytes received on this interface iflnPackets the number of packets received on this interface iflnErrors the number of packets received on this interface that could not be delivered to a higher layer protocol because they contained errors ifOutOctets the number of octets bytes transmitted by the interface including framing char acters ifOutPackets number of packets transmitted by the interface ifOutDiscards the number of outgoing packets that were discarded to prevent they were trans mitted by the interface This could be due to for instance the presence of an access list ifOutErrors the number of packets that could not be transmitted by the interface because they contained errors ra shdslRouter laninterface h24Performance This attribute displays the 24 hours performance summary of the LAN interface The h24Performance table contains the same elements as the shdsIRouter laninterface h2Performance table Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 101255 Reference manual Performance attributes 10 3 WAN interface performance attributes The WAN interface performance attributes are the same as the LAN interface performance attributes For a complete description of these attributes refer to 10 2 LAN interface performance attributes on page 252 256 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Performance attributes 10 4 WAN encapsulation performance attributes
54. protocols can be selected from a drop down box any 0 ICMP 1 IGMP 2 IPinIP 4 TCP 6 EGP 8 IGP 9 UDP 17 RSVP 46 IGRP 88 OSPFIGP 89 TCPestablished 255 sourcePortStart This is the source port as specified in the UDP TCP Default any start optional end sourcePortEnd Readers Range 0 65535 You can specify the port by typing the protocol number For ease of use some common port numbers can be selected from a drop down box any or optional 0 echo 7 discard 9 ftp data 20 ftp 21 telnet 23 smtp 25 domain 53 www http 80 pop3 110 nntp 119 snmp 161 snmptrap 162 239 50 210 syslog 514 router 520 socks 1080 I2tp 1701 telindus 1728 114 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router User manual Chapter 5 Step by step configuration JEEN a d destinationPortStart destinationPortEnd This is the destination port as specified in the UDP TCP headers Default any start optional end Range 0 65535 You can specify the port by typing the protocol number For ease of use some common port numbers can be selected from a drop down box see above newTosValue This is the new TOS field value When you select a new TOS field value then a packet Default unchanged Range 0 256 that matches an entry in the trafficShaping table its TOS field value is changed and the packet is redirected to a queue
55. router at this side local side of the link The ipcpMyOptions table contains the following elements JJ The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router supports the following IPCP option 3 the IP Address option For more information on the IPCP configuration options refer to RFC 1332 This is the length of the option field This is the option value represented as an octet string hexadecimal ASCII repre sentation shdsIRouter laninterface ppp ipcpHisOptions This attribute lists the IPCP options for the router at the other side remote side of the link The ipcpHisOptions table contains the same elements as the shdsIRouter laninterface ppp ipcpMyOptions table Other option values than the ones supported by the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router may be present Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 229 Reference manual Status attributes shdsIRouter laninterface ppp bcpMyOptions During the BCP handshake a number of options can be exchanged between the local and remote side of the link This attribute lists the BCP options for the router at this side local side of the link The bcpMyOptions table contains the following elements a The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router supports the following LCP options This is the Bridge Identification option This is the Line Identification option This is the MAC Support option This is the Tinygram Compression option This is the LAN Identification option This is
56. screws and reconnect the power supply The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router reboots and loads the default configuration Activate the loaded default configuration Open a TMA session on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Refer to 4 Managing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router on page 37 Execute the Activate Configuration action 1 If you are performing this load default configuration procedure because you accidentally made a configuration error you have the possibility to retrieve this erroneous configuration before executing the Activate Configuration com mand In that case you do not have to reconfigure the complete device again but you only have to correct the error in question Retrieve the erro neous configuration by executing the Load Saved Configuration command Again disconnect the power supply and open the housing Reset DIP switch bank DS1 position 2 to on Properly replace the cover and reconnect the power supply Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 53 User manual Step by step configuration 5 2 2 Loading the default configuration with TMA The following procedure shows how to load the default configuration using the Load Default Configura tion action in TMA shdsIRouter Load Default Configuration To load the default configuration proceed as follows In the TMA window select the top object shdsIRouter and the group Configuration In the action window of TMA click the left mouse butto
57. site 20 SNMP proxy configuration at tributes 202 Spanning Tree behaviour 99 bridge failure 99 bridging loops 99 cost 100 setting the 101 network extension 99 priority 100 setting the 101 root bridge what is 96 topology 97 topology changes detect ing 103 what is 95 specifications auxiliary connector 312 EMC compliance 314 environmental compliance 314 Ethernet LAN interface 311 line 309 connector lay out 309 maximum covered dis tance 310 management interface 312 mechanical dimensions 313 over voltage and over cur rent protection compli ance 313 power requirements 313 router features 308 safety compliance 313 statements iii Index 325 static route example 1 74 example 2 75 static route basic configuration 69 status attributes 209 bridging 243 Frame Relay 222 general 212 HDLC 231 L2TP tunnel 237 LAN interface 215 line 232 management 246 operating system 247 overview 210 PPP 226 routing 233 WAN encapsulation 221 WAN interface 220 step by step configuration 47 straps changing the settings 35 overview 34 strap ST1 34 structured value what is 42 T technical specifications 307 Time To Live TTL what is 179 TMA connecting over an IP net work 40 connecting through the aux iliary connector 39 how to connect 38 introduction 38 TMA attribute string reading a 50 TMA sub system picture 283 how to display 283 structure 283 traffic policy basic configuration 113 co
58. smwremenvevennneaennntnanannatanaantentetaatu kn ant enda 215 9 4 WAN interface Status AHMDULES tiina tatma lakata kka Sees ona eee dea 220 9 5 WAN encapsulation status attributes reenneenneeeneenenenenee 221 9 6 DING Stats attributes silte tigate techie AS a wees 232 9 7 Routing status AUIMDUILSS AMAAN A EME A DT oa rens 233 9 8 L2TP tunnel status attributes 1x tsivieet mititt aiaiai malakat En takka kk kaka alea j 237 99 Bridging stat sattrib teSi a vaateks t 243 9 10 Management status attributes eaananannennanenenananaeneennnannananaanannenannna 246 9 11 Operating system status attributes nenrrrnnenrrrmnai 247 10 Performance AHrIDULES access sac sagadi kata vaatada amka k ike at img miie ta ka v i 249 10 1 Performance attributes overview wernannnnammnneenemnnannmmentaaeenetenanaeed 250 10 2 LAN interface performance attributes ww 252 10 3 WAN interface performance attributes 255 10 4 WAN encapsulation performance attributes wwrre 256 10 5 Line performance attributes nrrrernnrmmmmmm 258 10 6 Routing performance attributes iieeerenannnananamennnntennannanennaetanninanneemee 261 10 7 L2TP tunnel performance attributes rrrmmme 266 10 8 Bridging performance attribute
59. table see below Use this attribute to configure the Frame Relay Data Link Connection Iden tifiers DLCIs The dlciTable contains the following elements Benet oseepton O O This is the DLCI number to reach a remote network Default 16 The DLCI number may have any value between 16 Range 16 1022 and 1022 However if you set the configuration attribute Imi to q933 Annex A you should only use DLCls up to 1007 This is the Committed Information Rate for the corre Pefault 0 sponding DLCI Range 0 2048000 The CIR is expressed in bps Any value between 0 and 2048000 bps can be con figured If the cir value is set to 0 default it means the complete bandwidth may be used no flow control This is the Excess Information Rate for the corre Default 0 sponding DLCI Range 0 2048000 The EIR is expressed in bps Any value between 0 and 2048000 bps can be con figured If the eir value is set to 0 default it means no excess burst is allowed If you configure EIR then CIR must also be configured Else there is no flow con routing Use this attribute to determine whether IP packets are Default enabled treated by the bridging process or not Range enabled disabled The routing element has the following values enabled IP packets are passed directly to the routing process IP packets not destined for the router its MAC address are discarded
60. than 200 dropped 1 As defined in the TOS field dropped dropped 196 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdsIRouter router trafficPolicy trafficShaping Default lt empty gt Range table see below In case you have set the shdslRouter router trafficPolicy method attribute to traf ficShaping then use the trafficShaping table to specify which data has to be redirected to which queue The trafficShaping table can be compared with an access list You can filter based on several criteria IP source and destination address TOS value etc A packet is redirected to the specified queue when the criteria are met and an overload condition occurs When more than one entry applies to the same packet then only the most specific one is taken in consideration l e the entry covering the smallest range The trafficShaping table contains the following elements ES peen sourcelpStart This is the IP source address as specified in the IP _ Default 0 0 0 0 Address header Range up to 255 255 255 255 sourcelpEnd Address destination pStart This is the IP destination address as specified in the Defauit 0 0 0 0 Address IP header Range up to 255 255 255 255 destinationlpEnd Address tosStartValue This is the Type Of Service field value Default any start optional end tosEndtValue Range 0 256
61. the MAC Address option This is the Spanning Tree Protocol option For more information on the LCP configuration options refer to RFC 2878 This is the length of the option field This is the option value represented as an octet string hexadecimal ASCII repre sentation kal shdslRouter laninterface ppp bcpHisOptions This attribute lists the BCP options for the router at the other side remote side of the link The bcpMyOptions table contains the same elements as the shdslRouter lanInterface ppp bcpMyOptions table Other option values than the ones supported by the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router may be present 230 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 Reference manual Status attributes shdsiRouter laninterface ppp myAuthenstate This attribute displays the authentication state of the router at this side local side of the link l e the state ofthe authenticator Possible values are No Authentication The local side does not request PPP authentication or still has to start the CHAP authentication LCP handshake is busy Wait On Response The local side has sent a challenge packet and is waiting for an answer Authen Successful The response packet is found to be correct This is the state when authentication succeeded Authen Failure The response packet is found to be incorrect This is a transient state since the router starts the LCP handshake again after a failing authentication s
62. the corresponding secrets 64 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router User manual Chapter 5 Step by step configuration ra shdslRouter wanlnterface ppp linkMonitoring Use this attribute to enable or disable link monitoring and to fine tune it Default Range structure see below The PPP protocol features link monitoring You can use this to verify whether the WAN link is up or down If link monitoring is enabled then the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router sends an echo request packet over the line at regular intervals If on consecutive requests no reply is given then the PPP link is declared down Data traffic is stopped until the PPP handshake succeeds again The linkMonitoring structure contains the following elements ES pee O O S operation Enables or disables link monitoring Default disabled Range enabled disabled interval This defines the time interval between two consecu tive echo requests Default 00000d 00h 00m 10s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s 24855d 03h 14m 07s replyTimeOut This defines the period that the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router waits for a reply on the echo reguest If no reply has been received within this time out then the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router considers this as a failed echo reguest Default 00000d 00h 00m 02s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s 00000d 00h 04m 15s failsPermitted This defines the number of failed echo requests after which the Telindus 1420
63. the following circuit types LAN interface line interface management interface Carefully read the safety instructions at the beginning of 2 Installing and connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router on page 17 ke NZ ZN Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Copyright safety and statements User and reference manual Statements C http Awww telindus com accessproducts Products Choose a product gt Download certificates Hereby Telindus declares that this Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router complies with the essential reguire ments and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Hierbij verklaart Telindus dat deze Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router overeenstemt met de essenti le vere isten en andere relevante bepalingen van Richtliin 1999 5 EC Par la pr sente Telindus declare que ce Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router est en conformit avec les exi gences essentielles et autres articles applicables de la Directive 1999 5 EC Hiermit Telindus erkl rt da dieser Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router in Fugsamkeit ist mit den wesentli chen Anforderungen und anderen relevanten Bereitstellungen von Direktive 1999 5 EC Mediante la presente Telindus declara gue el Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router cumple con los reguisitos esenciales y las dem s prescripciones relevantes de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Col presente Telindus dichiara che questo Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router in acguiescenza coi requisiti essenziali e stipulazioni attinenti
64. the metric parameter default by 1 before it writes the route in the routing table Hence the metric parameter indicates for each route how many rout ers have to be passed before reaching the network When several routes to a single network exist and they all have the same preference then the route with the smallest metric parameter is chosen However using the metric attribute you can increment the metric parameter by more than 1 up to a max imum of 15 You could do this for instance to indicate that a certain interface is less desirable to route through As a result the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router adds this value to the metric parameter of every route learnt through that interface The metric attribute is also used to represent the directly connected subnets on the LAN and WAN inter faces 154 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdsiRouter laninterface ripMode Default active Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to modify the RIP behaviour of the interface By default the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router transmits and receives RIP updates on all interfaces The ripMode attribute has the following values active RIP updates are transmitted and received on this interface passive RIP updates are not transmitted on this interface but received updates are parsed disabled RIP updates are nor transmitted nor received on this interface kal shds
65. transmit RIP updates Authentication of the received RIP updates is done by looking for the first secret with a matching key e Ifyou use text and if for a certain interface multiple secrets are present in the ripv2SecretTable then only the first entry in the ripv2SecretTable is used to transmit and receive RIP updates Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 177 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdslRouter router sysSecret Default lt empty gt Use this attribute for the CHAP authentication process The CHAP authen Range max 64 characters ticator uses the sysSecret attribute in order to verify the peer its response For more information refer to the configuration attribute shdsIRouter waninterface ppp authentication on page 169 shds Router router pppSecretTable Default lt empty gt Use this attribute for the CHAP authentication process Enter the CHAP Range table see below name and secret of the remote router in this table For more information refer to the configuration attribute shdslRouter wanInterface ppp authentication on page 169 The ripv2SecretTable table contains the following elements ES peen o o o Enter here the CHAP name of the remote router Default lt empty gt Ifthe remote router is a Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Range max 64 characters then the name element should correspond with the remote Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router its sysName attribute
66. values are the same as those of shdslRouter laninterface ppp IcpState Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 227 Reference manual Status attributes shdslRouter laninterface ppp lcpMyOptions During the LCP handshake a number of options can be exchanged between the local and remote side of the link This attribute lists the LCP options for the router at this side local side of the link The IcpMyOptions table contains the following elements The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router supports the following LCP options This is the Authentication Protocol option This is the Magic Number option For more information on the LCP configuration options refer to RFC 1661 This is the length of the option field This is the option value represented as an octet string hexadecimal ASCII repre sentation shdsiRouter laninterface ppp lcpHisOptions This attribute lists the LCP options for the router at the other side remote side of the link The lepMyOptions table contains the same elements as the shdsIRouter laninterface ppp lepMyOptions table Other option values than the ones supported by the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router may be present 228 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 Reference manual Status attributes shdsIRouter laninterface ppp ipepMyOptions During the IPCP handshake a number of options can be exchanged between the local and remote side of the link This attribute lists the IPCP options for the
67. 0 g example example TMA absolute 0 absolute 1 example absolute 30 To enable absolute addressing an address has to be specified in the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Do this with the cms2Address attribute Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 205 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdsIRouter management accessList Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to control the access from certain hosts or networks The access list filters incoming traffic for the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router based on the source IP address You can specify multiple entries within the access list When more than one entry applies to the same packet then only the most specific one is taken in consideration l e the entry covering the small est range If not one entry matches then the packet is dropped Ifthe access list is empty then all pack ets are forwarded The accessList table contains the following elements Pe T a sourceAddress This is the IP source address of the packet The Default 0 0 0 0 address may be a sub network address Range up to 255 255 255 255 mask This is the IP subnet mask for the sourceAddress By Default 255 255 255 255 combining an IP address with a mask you can Range up to 255 255 255 255 uniquely identify a range of addresses Before com paring IP addresses a logical AND function is made between both addresses and the mask action This
68. 0 e Class 1 equipment for Table Tops with 115 230 Vac internal power supply e Class 3 equipment for Table Tops with 115 230 Vac external power supply adapter Table Tops with 48 Vdc internal power supply Card Versions 15 9 Over voltage and over current protection compliance The over voltage and over current protection complies with ITU T K 44 and ETSI ETS 300 386 2 recom mendations 314 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 Reference manual Technical specifications 15 10 EMC compliance e EN55022 B Emissions e EN55024 Immunity e EN61000 3 2 Harmonics e EN61000 3 3 Voltage fluctuations and flicker e EN61000 4 2 ESD e EN61000 4 3 Radiated immunity e EN61000 4 4 EFT burst EN61000 4 5 Surge e EN61000 4 6 Conducted immunity e EN61000 4 8 Power magnetic field immunity e EN61000 4 11 Voltage dips 8 drops e ENV50204 Radiated immunity against digital radio telephone 15 11 Environmental compliance e Storage conditions ETSI ETS 300 019 1 1 Class 1 1 In addition the storage temperature has to be between 25 to 70 C Transport conditions ETSI ETS 300 019 1 2 Class 2 3 e Stationary use conditions ETSI ETS 300 019 1 3 Class 3 2 In addition the requirements below apply relative humidity 5 to 95 non condensing and ambient operational temperature 5 to 45 C or relative humidity 0 to 95 non condensing and ambient operational temperature 10 to 50 C Maximum altitude 3000m International pro
69. 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 netbiosNodeType Use this element to configure the client as described Default lt Opt gt in RFC 1001 1002 Range enumerated see below The netbiosNodeType element has the following values no node B node P node M node H node Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 81185 Configuration attributes shdsIRouter router dhcpDynamic Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to specify the IP address range from which an IP address may be dynamically assigned to a client its MAC address The dhcpDynamic table contains the following elements e a ipStartAddress This defines the start address ofthe IP address range It is from this range that an IP address will be dynam ically assigned to a client Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 If no IP start address is specified all other attributes on the same line in the table are ignored ipEndAddress This defines the end address ofthe IP address range It is from this range that an IP address will be dynam ically assigned to a client Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 The IP address range will only contain the ipStartAddress in case e no ipEndAddress is specified e the specified ipEndAddress is the same as the ipStartAddress e the specified ipEndAddress is smaller than the ipStartAddress the specified i
70. 0d 00h 00m 00s answer within this period Use the timeOut argument to 24855d 03h 14m 07s set this period WS shdsIRouter router stopPing Stops the pending pings Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 265 Reference manual Performance attributes shdsIRouter router resetNAT Use this action to release all sockets currently in use and return them to the free socket pool In other words executing this action resets all NAT PAT sessions that are currently established It also releases all official IP addresses that are dynamically assigned to a private IP address If any TCP ses sions are still active these sessions will be aborted Take care when using this action All TCP information is lost when the sockets are released with this action Any TCP sessions in use at the time of the reset will go into a hang up state These applications will need to restart 266 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Performance attributes 10 7 L2TP tunnel performance attributes Ta shdsiRouter router tunnels I2tpTunnels This attribute gives you performance information on the L2TP tunnels The I2tpTunnels table contains the following elements eita ee ee This is the name of the tunnel as you defined it in the I2tpTunnels configuration attribute mibCounters This structure displays the following SNMP MIB2 parameters of the L2TP tunnels iflnOctets iflnUcastPkts iflnNUcastPkts iflnDiscards if
71. 1420 SHDSL Router in CLI format is as follows ACTION Load Default Configuration SET SELECT lanInterface LIST ipAddress 192 168 47 254 SELECT wanInterface LIST ipAddress 192 168 100 1 encapsulation ppp SELECT router LIST defaultRoute gateway 192 168 100 254 interface wan patAddress 195 7 12 22 ACTION Activate Configuration Chapter 6 Configuration examples 124 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router User manual twork ing inane Bridging and rout 6 5 The example on the following page shows a combination of bridging and routing in a network 40 g uo H 7 8 9L Z2 Ie90 L 8 9 Z2L M9 911070 uo dl 78 91 ZZb dI NVM Aieud NVM yo g uo y uo dl b 8 9LCZL M9 UNejod F0S 9FC L dl NVI 193N04 yowms VOSIL Z2L MI Aejoy 20421 09 91 CLL dl Bunnoy uo dl4 no Oe S YST OSIL C1L dl uo q H0 Y 66 G9 LE ZZ IB90 M9 8 LOTIA Gui puig KERE uo 9 YO Y 66 S9 LE ZZL 1290 M9 84970 r t tyo e 9 3018 gi yO g UO Y 89 ZLL Ie90 Z 8 9L ZZL M9 941070 uo dI 8 917ZL di NVM Aleuulid NYM uo 9 yO y uo dit 66 39 LE ZZL dl II WATE ZZ 124 XdI NVI S9 LEZLL dl aa YaAMAS 3114 Xdi dl vo dit Mo Wnejeq N01 Ones O S LE ZLL ON 99 LE ZLI dl v AIS NYM uo g o y 66 39 LE Z2L dl NVI 19 NOM 66 S9 LE CLL MD OL G9 LE Z2L dl 66 S9 LE CLL
72. 19210527 2 299 297 252 0 122 100 47 224 am sthe e P 7 cal 1 LUUUU Uuh Urr UUs P3 19 1624 59 255 55 255 255 2 001 normal ore H l hos z 00000d 00h Or 003 P 4 3240 0 9 DA oea eT Ol moral 076 p l hos 00000d 00h Or 003 P5 Welbe WU 258 252 252 0 1 2468 1UJ 1 wan p zown l bol l 00000d 00h Orr 003 b6 193 162 100 25 252 252 256 127021 neral 078 zown 1 hos 00000d 00h Orr 003 b 193 165 8 2 255 752 252 0 122 168 103 3 war p zown v mac 1 00000d 00h Orr 003 The lines in the routing table depicted above represent the following Line 1 represents the default gateway which is not defined Lines 2 and 5 represent the subnets on the LAN and WAN interface respectively e Lines 3 and 6 represent the interface its IP addresses Line 7 represents the static route to the remote LAN Finally line 4 represents the multicast address for RIP version 2 Remark The host routes to the local interface IP address are always up The following figure illustrates this IP address LAN interface 192 168 47 254 f A IP Router modem modem tus TMA Telnet TFTP SNMP 192 168 47 254 OK IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 If the Ethernet LAN is not connected to the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router it is still possible to contact the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router with e g TMA or Telnet over the WAN link by using the LAN IP address It will however not respond on a ping made to its LAN IP address 140
73. 216 messages 214 myAuthenstate 230 natAddresses 235 noiseMargin 232 routingTable 233 secondarylpAddresses 215 spanningTree 244 status 232 sysDescr 212 sysObjectID 212 sysServices 212 sysUpTime 212 taskInfo 247 timeSinceLastRetrain 232 auto install 285 introduction 13 auxiliary connector specifica tions 312 B basic configuration bridging 92 Frame Relay encapsulation 58 IP addresses 54 line 55 NAT 89 NAT and PAT 79 PAT 85 PPP encapsulation 63 priority and traffic policy 108 priority policy 111 RIP 77 static route 69 traffic policy 113 tunnelling 104 WAN encapsulation 56 Index BDPU the propagation of 98 BootP 286 what is 286 BootP request DHCP server reaction on a 186 BootP versus DHCP releasing IP addresses 186 BPDU what is 98 bridge port state transition diagram 201 states 200 bridging basic configuration 92 configuration attributes 198 enabling 93 introduction 11 performance attributes 267 status attributes 243 bridging and routing in a net work a configuration exam ple 124 bridging protocol selecting a 94 Cc changing DIP switch and strap settings 35 CHAP authentication in both directions 65 in one direction 65 what is 65 common TCP and UDP num bers 317 configuration activating the 117 troubleshooting 130 configuration alarm attributes 276 configuration attributes 143 bridging 198 Frame Relay 164 general 146 HDLC 170 L2TP tunnel 188 LAN interfac
74. 2LineParameters table ra shdslRouter wanlnterface line linePair 1 h24Performance This attribute displays the 24 hours performance summary of the line The h24Performance table contains the same elements as the shdslRouter wanlnterface line linePair 1 h2Performance table 4 shdsIRouter waninterfacel line linePair 1 d7LineParameters This attribute displays the 7 days parameter summary of the line The d7LineParameters table contains the same elements as the shdsIRouter wanlnterface line linePair 1 h2LineParameters table ry shdsIRouter wanlnterfacel line linePair 1 d7Performance This attribute displays the 7 days performance summary of the line The d7Performance table contains the same elements as the shdsIRouter wanlnterface line linePair 1 h2Performance table ra shdslRouter wanInterface line linePair 1 lineParameters This attribute displays the parameter summary of the line since the last cold boot Except for the sysUp Time the lineParameters table contains the same elements as the shdslRouter wanlnterface line linePair 1 h2LineParameters table Ta shdsIRouter waninterfacel line linePair 1 performance This attribute displays the performance summary of the line since the last cold boot Except for the sysUp Time the performance table contains the same elements as the shdsIRouter wanlnterface line linePair 1 h2Performance table Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 261 Reference manual Perf
75. 4 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 8 Configuration attributes ra shdsIRouter router routingTable Use this attribute to configure the static IP routes The routingTable table contains the following elements Default lt empty gt Range table see below Laas rr network This is the IP address ofthe destination network Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 mask This is the network mask of the destination network Default 255 255 255 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 gateway This is the IP address of the next router on the path to Pefault 0 0 00 the destination network Range up to 255 255 255 255 Whether you can omit the gateway element or not is linked to the following condi tions If the interface element is set to you can not omit the gateway element you can omit the gateway element only when using PPP encapsulation interface This specifies the interface through which the destina tion network can be reached The interface element has the following values Default lt opt gt Range enumerated see below The interface element value is deduced from the setting of the gateway element refer to Deducing the interface ele ment value on page 173 Select the lt opt gt value for routes that use a tunnel The gateway can be reached through the Ethernet inter face The gateway can be rea
76. 5 255 255 255 mask This is the network mask of the destination network Default 255 255 255 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 gateway This is the IP address of the next router on the path to Pefault 0 0 00 the destination network Range up to 255 255 255 255 Whether you can omit the gateway element or not is linked to the following condi tions If the interface element is set to you can not omit the gateway element you can omit the gateway element only when using PPP encapsulation interface This specifies the interface through which the destina tion network can be reached The interface element has the following values Default lt opt gt Range enumerated see below The interface element value is deduced from the setting of the gateway element refer to Deducing the interface ele ment value on page 76 Select the lt opt gt value for routes that use a tunnel The gateway can be reached through the Ethernet inter face The gateway can be reached through the serial inter face discard Packets for this destination are discarded preference This defines the level of importance of the route with respect to routes learnt via RIP Default 10 Range 1 200 RIP routes always have a preference of 60 Routes with a lower preference value are chosen over routes with higher preference value Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5
77. 5 3 Ethernet LAN interface The LAN interface specifications are as follows connector 8 pins RJ45 female operation 10BaseT Ethernet The following table shows the connector layout of the RJ45 Ethernet LAN interface connector transmit positive transmit negative MNN Ti s 8 receive positive not used not used receive negative not used not used 312 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 Reference manual Technical specifications 15 4 Management interface The possible management interfaces are Management interface Connector type Speed LAN interface RJ45 10 Mbps asynchronous through the auxil 9 pins subD 9600 bps 8 N iary connector 15 5 Auxiliary connector The auxiliary connector sometimes also called NMS or control port is a 9 pins subD connector labelled AUX The signals on these connector are V 24 V 28 signals The auxiliary connector has the following pin layout NMS RxD NMS TxD not used GND not used NMS RTS NMS CTS o o NI ODO oO A WwW N Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 313 Reference manual Technical specifications 15 6 Power requirements The power requirements are as follows e 9Vdc 1000 MA 15 7 Mechanical dimensions The power requirements are as follows height 38 mm e width 150 mm depth 250 mm weight 1 kg 15 8 Safety compliance EN6095
78. 68 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 IP subnet 192 168 48 0 mask 255 255 255 0 The configuration of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router in CLI format is as follows ACTION Load Default Configuration SET SELECT lanInterface LIST ipAddress 192 168 47 254 SELECT wanInterface LIST ipAddress 192 168 100 1 SELECT frameRelay LIST Imi type ansit1 617 d dliciTable a dlci 19 gateway 192 168 100 2 o SELECT router LIST routingTable a network 192 168 48 0 gateway 192 168 100 2 o ACTION Activate Configuration 122 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuration examples 6 3 Connecting a LAN to the Internet using NAT and PAT This is an example of a local network that only uses private addresses A PPP link connects your site to the Internet Service Provider At your site a Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is installed You only received 2 official IP addresses from the ISP one for all outgoing traffic using PAT 195 7 12 22 and one for accessing the local web server using NAT 195 7 12 21 with a ded icated private address IP address WAN interface PAT address 195 7 12 22 IP address LAN interface 192 168 47 254 your site IP address WAN interface 195 7 12 254 Frame Relay or PDH SDH network MD 6 bs ISP serial intf Router modem modem Web server with IP address 192 168 47 250 The configurat
79. 71 User manual Step by step configuration a SN a E l metric This determines with how much the Telindus 1420 Default 1 SHDSL Router increments the metric parameter of a Range 1 15 route Routing information includes a metric parameter Every time a router is passed this parameter is incremented Also the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router increments the metric parameter default by 1 before it writes the route in the routing table Hence the metric parameter indicates for each route how many routers have to be passed before reaching the network When several routes to a single network exist and they all have the same preference then the route with the smallest metric parameter is chosen However using the metric element you can increment the metric parameter by more than 1 up to a maximum of 15 You could do this for instance to indicate that a certain interface is less desirable to route through As a result the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router adds this value to the metric parameter of every route learnt through that interface The metric attribute is also used to represent the directly connected subnets on the LAN and WAN interfaces 72 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration Example 1 Static IP route with an IP address on the WAN interface IP address WAN interface IP address WAN interface 192 168 100 1 192 168 100 2 IP address LAN interface IP address LAN interf
80. 9 Reference manual Status attributes Benet pe O bridging This structure displays the bridging information of the tunnel For more information refer to the status attribute shdslRouter laninterface bridgePortSta tus on page 218 This structure displays the L2TP information of the tunnel For more information refer to the shdsIRouter router tunnels I2tpTunnels I2tp on page 238 This structure displays the PPP information of the tunnel For more information refer to the status attributes shdsIRouter laninterface ppp lcpState shdslRouter laninterface ppp ipcpState shdsIRouter laninterface ppp bcpState shdsIRouter lanin terface ppp myAuthenstate and shdsIRouter laninterface ppp hisAuthenstate shdsiRouter router tunnels I2tpTunnels I2tp The I2tp structure in the I2tpTunnels table displays the L2TP information of the tunnel The I2tp structure contains the following elements C E sendingSeqNr In case sequence numbering on the data messages is enabled dataChannelSequen ceNumbering on then this displays the transmit data sequence numbers receivingSeqNr In case sequence numbering on the data messages is enabled dataChannelSequen ceNumbering on then this displays the receive data sequence numbers I2tpType This displays which L2TP server type the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router currently is LAC or LNS If you set the configuration attribute I2tpType to auto then the status attribute I2tpType
81. Call Disconnect Notify mes sage The session then returns to the idle state Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 241 Reference manual Status attributes L2TP status delivery states The states associated with the packet delivery are operating The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router has sent a packet but has not received an acknowledgement on this packet yet idle All transmitted packets have been acknowledged 242 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 Reference manual Status attributes L2TP status authentication states The states associated with the LNS or LAC authentication are noAuthentication Authentication is not enabled This is also the start up state for the authentication process authenSuccessful Authentication was successful The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router remains in this state during data transfer authenFailure Authentication failed This is a transient state since the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router starts the handshake again after a failing authentication Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 243 Reference manual Status attributes 9 9 Bridging status attributes shdslRouter bridge bridgeCache When a port of the bridge enters the learning state it stores the MAC addresses of the stations situated on the LAN that is connected to this port The MAC addresses are stored in a MAC address database or bridge cache The bridgeCache attribute visualises this address database The bridgeCach
82. Echo Request is sent when an IP address is leased by a client If an ICMP Echo Reply is received it means the IP address is already in use Therefore another IP address is assigned shdsIRouter router lt configurationAlarmAttributes gt For more information on the configuration alarm attributes alarmMask and alarmLevel and on the alarms in general refer to 11 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 275 For more information on the alarms of the router object refer to 11 7 Routing alarms on page 282 188 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes 8 8 L2TP tunnel configuration attributes i shdslRouter router tunnels I2tpTunnels Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to configure the Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol tunnels you want to set up The I2tpTunnels table contains the following elements a E This is the name of the tunnel Default lt empty gt The tunnel name is used in status and performance Range max 64 characters information to distinguish the different tunnels from one another adminStatus This activates up or deactivates the tunnel down Default down Range up down Use this structure to assign IP addresses to the tunnel For more information refer to shdsIRouter router tunnels i2tpTunnels ip on page 189 bridging Use this structure to configure the bridging feature in the tunn
83. F ED ipAddress This is the IP address type This is the ARP cache entry type Possible values are dynamic The MAC IP address pair is retrieved from an ARP request or reply message static The MAC IP address pair is configured There is only one static entry i e the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router its own IP and MAC address timeOut This is the time the entry will remain in the ARP cache For the static entry this value is 0 The following figure shows part of an ARP cache table as an example V apCache b1 00 20 AF BD 47 9B 194 7 48 84 dynamic 00000d Olh 12m 17s gt 2 00 00 0C 40 29 B1 194 7 48 37 dynamic 00000d 01h 59m 55s b3 00 50 8B 2E 3B 94 194 7 48 163 dynamic 00000d 01h 59m 56s b4 00 10 4B B1 34 1C 10 0 8 128 dynamic 00000d 01h 58m 19s gt 5 00 50 04 40 8B C2 194 7 48 148 dynamic 00000d 01h 59m 56s b 6 00 08 C7 09 40 10 194 7 48 10 dynamic 00000d 01h 59m 02s gt 7 00 10 54 4D 32 56 194 7 48 185 dynamic 00000d 01h 58m 115 b8 00 10 54 FB BA 8E 10 0 8 154 dynamic 00000d 01h 55m 06s W3 00 20 AF F1 EE 34 10 0 8 180 dynamic 00000d 01h 56m 48s gt 10 00 10 83 27 17 97 194 7 48 60 dynamic 00000d 01h 59m 31s 218 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 Reference manual Status attributes shdsiRouter laninterface ipAdEntBcastAddr This attribute displays the value of the least significant bit in the IP broadcast address This address is used for sending packets on the in
84. HDSL Router Chapter 8 203 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdslRouter snmpProxy mib2Traps Default off Range on off Use this attribute to enable on or disable off the sending of SNMP traps as MIB2 traps If you want to send the SNMP traps as MIB2 traps proceed as follows Select the trapDestinations attribute Add an entry to this table for each network manage ment station that should receive SNMP traps In the trapDestinations table define the IP address of the management stations that should receive the SNMP traps In the trapDestinations table configure the community element associated with each trap des tination Configure the mib2Traps attribute Select this value if the management station is any SNMP station without the TMA for HP OpenView application In that case the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router sends the alarms coldBoot warmBoot and linkDown as MIB2 traps instead of enterprise specific private MIB traps Select this value if the management system is the TMA for HP OpenView application In that case the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router sends all alarms as enterprise spe cific private MIB traps Set for each object of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router the alarms that you want to send using the attribute alarmMask e the importance of each alarm using the attribute alarmLevel By default only the most important alarms are enabled 204 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Rou
85. L exceeded messages disabled The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router does not send ICMP TTL exceeded mes sages This also implies that the router is not recognised by the UNIX or Windows trace route feature 180 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdsiRouter router sendPortUnreachable Default enabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to enable or disable the sending of ICMP port unreacha ble messages The ICMP message port unreachable The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router supports a number of higher layer IP protocols Telnet SNMP and TMA for management purposes If an IP packet is sent to the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router for a higher layer protocol that it does not support it normally sends an ICMP port unreachable message to the orig inator of the packet With the sendPortUnreachable attribute you can define whether you want the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router to send such ICMP messages or not The sendPortUnreachable attribute has the following values enabled The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router sends ICMP destination unreachable reason port unreachable messages disabled The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router does not send ICMP port unreachable mes sages This also implies that the router is not recognised by the UNIX or Windows trace route feature shdslRouter router sendAdminUnreachable Default enabled Range enabled
86. LCP request from the remote side Opened The LCP handshake succeeded If lcpState is something else than Initial or Opened the problem is located in the LCP handshake Also check the LCP state of the remote router Possibly there is a compatibility problem with the LCP options ra shdsIRouter laninterface ppp ipcpState This attribute reflects the status of the IPCP Internet Protocol Control Protocol protocol The possible values are the same as those of shdslRouter lanInterface ppp IcpState If ipcpState is something else than Initial or Opened the problem is located in the IPCP handshake Also check the IPCP state of the remote router Possibly there is a compatibility problem with the IPCP options ra shdsIRouter laninterface ppp bcpState This attribute reflects the status ofthe BCP Bridging Control Protocol protocol The possible values are the same as those of shdsIRouter laninterface ppp lcpState If bepState is something else than Initial or Opened the problem is located in the BCP handshake Also check the BCP state of the remote router Possibly there is a compatibility problem with the BCP options Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 137 User manual Troubleshooting 7 8 How to check the routing status If your LAN and WAN interfaces are up but the data is not routed as desired you can verify the routing table status information shdslRouter router routingTable This attribute lists all known route
87. MD 129 99 LE CLL dl LN3IT19 Xdi dl uo dld ejNo1 Oe S 08 99 LE Z2L dl 0 99 LE Z2L ION gadis kemaje9 MO Guipug g Gunnoy Y o ggz ggz ggz sue sysew jouqns y isyseway Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 61125 User manual Configuration examples 6 6 Tunnelling in a network The following figure gives an example of a tunnel set up WAN interface 207 46 197 101 LAN interface 10 0 28 99 WAN interface 198 182 196 56 Router B modem i local tunnel 192 168 5 1 IP subnet 10 0 24 0 mask 255 255 248 0 IP subnet 10 1 1 0 mask 255 255 255 0 local tunnel 192 168 5 2 The following shows how the tunnels I2tpTunnels table would look like for Router A Configuring the tunnels I2tpTunnels table gt get 12tpTunnels 1 12tp 12tpTunnels 1 localIpAddress 192 168 0 1 name Outgoing Tunnel 1 remoteIpAddress 192 168 0 2 adminStatus up pppAuthentication enabled ip type outgoingLeasedLine dataChannelSequenceNumbering off ipAddress 192 168 5 1 keepAliveTimeOut 25 ipNetMask 255 255 255 0 12tpType auto ipGateway 192 168 5 2 tunnelAuthentication on ripMode disabled tunnelSecret tunnell maxNrOfRetransmissions 4 bridging transmitWindowSize 4 receiveWindowSize 4 bridging disabled udpChecksum off priority 128 pathCost 500 topologyChangeDetection enabled Configuring a ro
88. Max the maximum line attenuation that was measured dB noiseMarginMin dB the minimum noise margin that was measured noiseMarginAvrg the average noise margin that was calculated dB noiseMarginMax the maximum noise margin that was measured dB H shdsIRouter wanlnterfacel line linePair 1 h2Performance This attribute displays the 2 hours performance summary of the line The h2Performance table contains the following elements Element For the corresponding period this element displays sysUpTime the elapsed time since the last cold boot codeViolations the number of line errors that was counted erroredSeconds the number of erroneous seconds that was counted sevErroredSeconds the number of severely erroneous seconds that was counted unavailableSeconds the number of unavailable seconds that was counted loswSeconds the number of lost synchronisation words that was counted l A For the correct and unambiguous definition of code violations errored and severely errored seconds unavailability and lost sync words refer to the recommendation G 826 260 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Performance attributes ra shdslRouter wanlnterface line linePair 1 h24LineParameters This attribute displays the 24 hours parameter summary of the line The h24LineParameters table contains the same elements as the shdslRouter wanlnterface line linePair 1 h
89. Relay situations can arise for which split hori zon operation is not so ideal If the WAN interface is connected to a Frame Relay network it is possible that each Data Link Connection Identifier DLCI has its own remote router In other words they could be considered as individual sub interfaces By default routing information received via one DLCI is not propagated to the other DLCls over the same physical interface However setting the splitHorizon attribute to disabled allows the routing information received via one DLCI to be propagated to the other DLCIS 162 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes ra shdslRouter wanlnterface encapsulation Default frameRelay Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to select the encapsulation protocol on the WAN interface The encapsulation attribute has the following values frameRelay Selects Frame Relay encapsulation Frame Relay is a synchronous communica tion protocol ppp Selects Point To Point encapsulation PPP can be synchronous or asynchronous Selects High Level Data Link Control encapsulation kal shdsIRouter wanlnterface lt configurationAlarmAttributes gt For more information on the configuration alarm attributes alarmMask and alarmLevel and on the alarms in general refer to 11 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 275 For more information on the alarms of the wanlnterface object refer
90. Router flash1Version This attribute displays the code and version of the firmware currently stored in flash memory bank 1 If this value is empty then flash memory bank 1 does not contain firmware Example Txxxx xxxxx 01 01 00 12 00 In this example the following parameters are visible Txxxx is the firmware code for this device xxxxx is the firmware version e 01 01 00 is the firmware release date 12 00 is the firmware release time shdslRouter flash2Version This attribute displays the code and version of the firmware currently stored in flash memory bank 2 If this value is empty then flash memory bank 2 does not contain firmware or the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is equipped with one flash memory bank only shdslRouter activeFlash This attribute displays which flash memory bank is currently active If the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is equipped with one flash memory bank only then this value is always flash1 shdsIRouter bootVersion This attribute displays the code and version of the boot software currently used in the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router shdsIRouter flashVersions This attribute indicates how many flash memory banks are present in the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Hence it indicates how many firmware versions can be stored in the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Pos sible values are 1 and 2 214 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 m Reference manual Status attributes shdslRouter messages
91. S subState This gives additional information on the port state Possible values are This is the port through which the root bridge can be reached Conseguently the root bridge itself does not have a root port All other bridges must have a root port designated This is the designated port for this virtual LAN All ports of the root bridge are designated ports alternate This port is not active Either because of a management action or through protocol intervention designatedPriority Together these two attributes form a unigue bridge identifier Depending whether the current port is a designated port or not these two attributes display the unigue bridge identifier of designatedMac e the bridge to which this port belongs in case of a designated port the bridge believed to be the designated bridge for the LAN that is currently connected to this port in all other cases This bridge identifier is used together with the designatedPortPriority and designatedPortld attributes to determine whether this port should be the designated port for the LAN that is currently connected to this port to test the value ofthe bridge identifier parameter conveyed in received Config uration BPDUs designatedPort Together these two attributes form a unigue port identifier They display the Priority unigue port identifier of the bridge port through which the designated bridge trans designatedPortld mits the config
92. SHDSL Router sends an echo reguest packet over the line at regular intervals If on consecutive reguests no reply is given then the PPP link is declared down Data traffic is stopped until the PPP handshake succeeds again The linkMonitoring structure contains the following elements mew pe operation Enables or disables link monitoring Default disabled Range enabled disabled interval This defines the time interval between two consecu tive echo requests Default 00000d 00h 00m 10s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s 24855d 03h 14m 07s replyTimeOut This defines the period that the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router waits for a reply on the echo reguest If no reply has been received within this time out then the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router considers this as a failed echo reguest Default 00000d 00h 00m 02s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s 00000d 00h 04m 15s failsPermitted This defines the number of failed echo requests after which the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router declares the WAN link down Example Default 4 Range 1 30 Suppose failsPermitted is set to 10 If on 10 consecutive echo requests no reply is given then the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router declares the WAN link down and the PPP handshake is started again Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 169 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdsiRouter waninterface ppp authentication Default disabled Range chap disabled
93. Status Enquiry messages within 4 x 10s 40s then the interface is declared down expectedPollinterval This defines the maximum time between two consec Default 00000d 00h 00m 15s utive incoming Status Enquiry messages Select the Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s value 0 in order to disable verification 00000d 00h 00m 30s This attribute is only relevant when using Frame Relay over a point to point link no Frame Relay network In Frame Relay language a router is normally considered as a DTE However if two routers are connected to each other in Frame Relay but without a real Frame Relay network in between then the routers also take the role of a DCE This hap pens automatically without the need of a reconfiguration The Status Enquiry mes sages are sent in both directions fullEnquirylnterval This defines the number of Status Enquiry intervals Defauit6 that have to go by before sending a Full Status Range 1 255 Enquiry message 168 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual 8 5 2 PPP configuration attributes Chapter 8 Configuration attributes ra shdslRouter wanlnterface ppp linkMonitoring Use this attribute to enable or disable link monitoring and to fine tune it Default Range structure see below The PPP protocol features link monitoring You can use this to verify whether the WAN link is up or down If link monitoring is enabled then the Telindus 1420
94. Status disabled Structured values coldBoot disabled warmB oot disabled codeConsistencyFail disabled onfigConsistencvFail disabled vvrvrvr PP vv 42 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Containment tree terminology The following table explains the terminology associated with the containment tree containment tree The containment tree represents the hierarchical structure of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router It is composed of a number of objects that are ordered in a tree This tree resembles a Windows directory structure e itis also a levelled structure with nodes which can be expanded or reduced the containment tree objects can be compared with file folders e the objects contain attributes like file folders contain files An object represents a physical interface an application or a combination of both Each object has its own set of attributes Example The object shdslRouter contains the sub object laninterface This object contains all the attributes concerning the LAN interface E g the configuration attribute ipAddress attribute An attribute is a parameter related to a certain object It has a certain value Example The object laninterface contains the status attribute ifOperStatus which has as possi ble values up and down An attribute has a certain value which is e changeable in case of a configuration attribute provided you have
95. T amp PAT NAT and PAT with private addresses on the LAN interface and public addresses on the WAN interface or vice versa Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 309 Reference manual Technical specifications 15 2 Line specifications Specifications The line specifications are as follows connector RJ12 impedance 135 Q line speeds from 64 kbps up to 2304 kbps in steps of 64 kbps throughput delay 300 msec compliant to ETSI DTR tm 3036 transmit level 13 5 dBm compliant to ETSI DTR tm 3036 coding TC PAM compliant to G 991 2 G SHDSL handshaking compliant to G 994 1 performance conform to the following standard noise margin specifications distance cov e Bellcore TA NWT 001210 ered noise free ANSI T1E1 4 94 006 ETSI ETR 152 The line connector lay out The following table shows the connector layout of the RJ12 line connector not used not used ULL 1 ace line line not used not used 310 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 Reference manual Technical specifications Maximum covered distance The following table gives the maximum covered distance over a noise free line Line speed Maximum covered distance km for a given wire diameter kbps 0 4mm 0 5 mm 0 6 mm 0 8 mm 1 0 mm 26AWG 24AWG 20AWG 18AWG Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 311 Reference manual Technical specifications 1
96. TEL MDUS Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router USER AND REFERENCE MANUAL Version 1 2 181363 Telindus Technical Publications Geldenaaksebaan 335 B 3001 Leuven Belgium Tel 32 16 382011 ii Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Copyright safety and statements User and reference manual Document properties Subject Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Manual type User and reference manual Version 1 2 Code 181363 Modification date 22 October 2002 OTelindus Copyright notice The information and descriptions contained in this publication are the property of Telindus Such infor mation and descriptions must not be copied or reproduced by any means or disseminated or distributed without the express prior written permission of Telindus This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors for which Telindus never can or shall be held liable Changes are made periodically to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of this publication Telindus may make improvements and or changes in the product s described in this publication at any time without prior notice This eguipment for safety and hygiene purposes complies with the specific provisions contained in ARAB RGPT 54 guater 3 1 RD 20 06 1975 Art 1 Section X Accident Prevention Policy Safety reguirements The interfaces of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router should only be connected to
97. TFTP request for file his_name cms TFTP unicast request TFTP reply with file his_name cms TFTP unicast request TFTP request for file his_name cli broadcast TFTP reply with file his_name cli 294 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 13 6 Creating configuration files In 13 5 Getting the configuration with TFTP on page 291 you have seen how you can get a configura tion file with TFTP This section explains how to create such configuration files First it explains the two different configuration file formats The following table gives an overview of this section 13 6 1 Configuration file formats on page 295 13 6 2 Creating a binary configuration file on page 296 13 6 3 Creating an ASCII configuration file on page 297 13 6 4 Creating an ASCII file using the TFTP get command on page 298 13 6 5 Creating an ASCII file using the CLI get command on page 299 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 295 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 13 6 1 Configuration file formats The two possible configuration file formats used by TFTP are File type Extension How to create the configuration file Use the TMA export utility and choose the CMS file type This is the most compact format Use the CLI user interface When you download an ASCII cli configuration file to the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router make sure that each
98. Then you can start an ATWIN session Web Interface You are prompted to enter the password when the session starts TFTP Enter the password after the destination file name Separate password and file name by a Example put sourcefile destinationfile pwd Define the password as community string If no passwords are defined then you can use any string as community string Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 149 Reference manual Configuration attributes Correcting the security table If you forgot your password or you forgot to create one with write and security access then you can set the Load Default Configuration DIP switch As a result the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router reboots in its default configuration You can then retrieve the erroneous configuration and correct it To correct the security table proceed as follows Disconnect the power supply and open the housing as described in 3 4 Changing DIP switch and strap settings on page 35 Set DIP switch bank DS1 position 2 to off To locate this DIP switch bank refer to 3 DIP switches and straps of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router on page 31 Replace the cover without fastening the screws and reconnect the power supply gt The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router reboots and loads the default configuration Retrieve the erroneous configuration Open a TMA session on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Refer to 4 Managing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Rou
99. This attribute displays the number of times a frame was flooded on all interfaces because e it was a broadcast multicast e the position of the station with the destination MAC address was not known 268 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Performance attributes 10 9 Management performance attributes shdslRouter management cms2SessionCount This attribute displays the number of CMS2 sessions that are currently active on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router There are always minimum two fixed sessions active Connecting with TMA TMA CLI Telnet etc opens additional sessions This is explained in the following table Session count Purpose 1 fixed session A fixed session for SNMP 1 fixed session A fixed session for 010 2 sessions When connecting with TMA 1 session When connecting with TMA for HP OpenView or the Alarm Manager 1 session When connecting with TMA CLI 2 sessions When downloading a config cli or config cms file 1 session When connecting with Telnet 1 session When downloading firmware 1 session When connecting with the Web Interface shdslRouter managementitftpSessionCount This attribute displays the number of TFTP sessions that are currently active on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router shdslRouter management cliSessionCount This attribute displays the number of CLI sessions that are currently active on the Telindus 1420
100. UdpSocketTimeOut natTcpSockets natUdpSockets dhcpStatic dhcpDynamic dhcpCheckAddress alarmMask alarmLevel gt gt gt loopback ipAddress gt gt gt tunnels I2tpTunnels gt gt gt priorityPolicy algorithm countingPolicy gueueConfigurations lowdelayQuotum gt gt gt trafficPolicy method dropPrecedence trafficShaping tos2QueueMapping gt gt bridge spanningTree bridgeTimeOut 1 Not present by default has to be added 146 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes 8 2 General configuration attributes shdslRouter sysName Default lt empty gt Range max 64 characters Use this attribute to assign a name to the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The sysName attribute is an SNMP MIB2 parameter shdsiRouter sysContact Default lt empty gt Range max 64 characters Use this attribute to add contact information You could for instance enter the name and telephone number of the person to contact in case problem occur The sysContact attribute is an SNMP MIB2 parameter shdsiRouter sysLocation Default lt empty gt Range max 64 characters Use this attribute to specify the physical location of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The sysLocation attribute is an SNMP MIB2 parameter shdsiRouter bootFromFlash Default auto Range enumerated see below If the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is equi
101. access password as configured in the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router If no password has been configured you may omit the and the password When the file transfer is finished close the TFTP session Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 307 Reference manual Technical specifications 15 Technical specifications This chapter gives the technical specifications ofthe Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this chapter e 15 1 Router features on page 308 e 15 2 Line specifications on page 309 e 15 3 Ethernet LAN interface on page 311 e 15 4 Management interface on page 312 e 15 5 Auxiliary connector on page 312 e 15 6 Power requirements on page 313 e 15 7 Mechanical dimensions on page 313 e 15 8 Safety compliance on page 313 e 15 9 Over voltage and over current protection compliance on page 313 15 10 EMC compliance on page 314 15 11 Environmental compliance on page 314 308 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 15 Reference manual Technical specifications 15 1 Router features The router features are as follows an ET routing static routing amp RIP version 2 access access lists on each interface WAN encapsulation PPP encapsulation RFC 1661 LCP and RFC 1332 IPCP with PPP CHAP authentication RFC 1994 Frame Relay encapsulation RFC 1490 with LMI CCITT ANSI T1 617 D and revision 1 PVCs only inverse ARP auto install NA
102. ace 192 168 47 254 192 168 48 254 Router A Router B CD ED modem modem AT GB IP subnet 192 168 47 0 IP subnet 192 168 48 0 mask 255 255 255 0 mask 255 255 255 0 In this example two LANS are interconnected via a modem link The two routers have an IP address on their WAN interface To make network 192 168 48 0 reachable from network 192 168 47 0 and vice versa you have to define one static route in router A left and one static route in router B right as fol lows Router A routingT able l b 1 192 168 48 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 100 2 lt 0pb 10 2 Router B routingT able network mask gateway interface_ preference metric gt 1 192 168 47 0 255 255 2550 1921681001 lt Opt 10 2 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration Example 2 Static IP route without an IP address on the WAN interface IP address LAN interface IP address LAN interface 192 168 47 254 192 168 48 254 Router A Router B modem IP subnet 192 168 47 0 IP subnet 192 168 48 0 mask 255 255 255 0 mask 255 255 255 0 This example is similar to the previous one except that now the WAN interfaces do not have an IP address To make network 192 168 48 0 reachable from network 192 168 47 0 and vice versa you have to define one static route in router A left and one static route in router B right as follows Router A W routingTable network mas
103. al Installing and connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 25 2 5 3 Connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router an example line outlet TIHTI TT M A p ere nei RJ12 cable 2 The following figure shows a typical Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router set up straight male female DB9 cable straight RJ45 RJ45 cable Ethernet hub hub external power supply i j computer running TMA 26 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 2 6 The front panel LED indicators This section gives an overview of the front panel LEDs and what they indicate The following gives an overview of this section 2 6 1 Introducing the front panel LEDs on page 27 e 2 6 2 The power LED PWR on page 28 e 2 6 3 The test LED TST on page 28 e 2 6 4 The transmit data LED TXD on page 29 e 2 6 5 The receive data LED RXD on page 29 2 6 6 The LAN transmit data LED LAN TXD on page 30 e 2 6 7 The LAN receive data LED LAN RXD on page 30 e 2 6 8 The collision LED COL on page 30 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 27 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 2 6 1 Introducing the front panel LEDs When all the connections are made and the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is powered the LEDs on the front panel reflect the actual status of the device The following figure shows the front panel LED indicator
104. alue of the ifOperStatus attribute is up Protocol The ifOperStatus attribute is up i e the alarm wanlnterface alarminfo linkDown off in case Frame Relay LMI is up The WAN interface is down data transfer is not possible Important remarks e Whether the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is configured in bridging or routing has no effect on the value of the attributes shdslRouter wanlnterface ifOperStatus Status and shdslRouter wanlnterface alarmlnfo link Down Alarms Incase of Frame Relay if the configuration attribute element shdslRouter wanlnterface frameRelay Imi type is set to noLmiConfigured then the value of the attribute shdsIRouter waninterface frameRelay Imi state Status is always up However the other conditions as stated in the table above remain Incase of PPP if the configuration attribute element shdsIRouter wanlnterface ppp linkMonitoring operation is set to disabled then it is possible that the ifOperStatus value does not go down even if the link quality is too bad for a proper data link This because the link monitoring mechanism is the only PPP mecha nism that will start a renegotiation of the LCP layer 134 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Troubleshooting The status of the WAN LEDs Check the status of the LEDs TXD and RXD to verify whether data can be sent to or received from the WAN What to do ifthe WAN interface is down In case the WAN interface is down you could
105. am Files TMA snmp with the name router mib The first part of the directory path may be different if you did not choose the default path during the installation of the TMA data files For more information refer to 8 12 SNMP proxy configuration attributes on page 202 and the documentation of your SNMP browser Management tools connection possibilities The following table gives an overview of all the management possibilities and how you can connect them Management PC Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router PC Orchid connection tool connection Orchid 1003 LAN as proxy Serial IP Serial IP EasyConnect CLI ATWIN TMA TMA CLI TMA for HPOV SNMPS Web Interface 1 For more information on how to set up the Orchid as a proxy agent refer to the Orchid 1003 LAN manual 2 A serial connection is a connection between the COM port of your PC and the auxiliary con nector of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router using a male female DB9 cable 3 An IP connection is a connection between your PC and the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router over an IP network Using a VT100 terminal emulation program Using Telnet Using an SNMP browser Using a web browser NO Ff 16 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 1 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 17 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 2 Installing and connectin
106. ameRelay dlciTable routing shdsIRouter waninterface ppp bridgePortlnfo bridging shdslRouter wanInterface ppp routing 92 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration 5 9 2 Selecting a bridging protocol kal shdslRouter bridge spanningTree spanningTreeProtocol Defaultnone Range enumerated see below Use the spanningTreeProtocol element of the spanningTree structure to select a bridging mechanism The spanningTreeProtocol element has the following values The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router uses the self learning principle This means that the bridge itself learns which data it has to forward and which data it has to block 1 e it builds its own bridging table IEEE p802 1D The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router uses the self learning principle in conjunction with the Spanning Tree protocol Because Spanning Tree bridging is somewhat more complicated than self learn ing bridging an introduction is given in 5 9 3 What is Spanning Tree on page 95 q When using Frame Relay encapsulation on the WAN interface together with the Spanning Tree protocol every DLCI is considered as a separate bridge port Each DLCI link is than considered as a special kind of LAN with only both end points connected Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 93 User manual Step by step configuration 5 9 3 What is Spanning Tree Spanning Tree Spanning Tree is a link management protocol Its pr
107. an access list This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter shdsIRouter lanlnterface ifOutErrors This attribute displays the number of outgoing packets that could not be transmitted by the interface because they contained errors This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter shds Router lanInterface ifOutQLen This attribute displays the length of the output packet queue expressed in packets on the interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter shdsiRouter laninterface bridgeAccessList This attribute shows information on the use ofthe bridge access list The bridgeAccessList table contains the following elements C 2 17 SUNNI macAddress This isthe MAC address as configured in the configuration attribute bridgeAccessList uses This indicates the number of times a packet has been discarded because of the specific MAC address entry in the access list 254 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Performance attributes ra shdsIRouter laninterface h2Performance This attribute displays the 2 hours performance summary of the LAN interface The h2Performance table contains the following elements Element For the corresponding period this element displays sysUpTime the elapsed time since the last cold boot ifUpTime the time during which the interface was up ifStatusChanges the amount of times the ifOperStatus value of the interface has changed from up to down or vice versa iflnOctets the
108. an be running with a low medium or high priority This element gives the percentage of time this task has been running with medium priority during the last 30 seconds runninginHigh Each task can be running with a low medium or high priority This element gives the percentage of time this task has been running with high priority during the last 30 seconds The percentage of time this task has been running with low priority can be calcu lated using the following formula running in low priority 100 runninginMedium runninginHigh programCounter This is the current value of the program counter The program counter is the mem ory address for the current instruction of this task 248 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 Reference manual Status attributes Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 249 Reference manual Performance attributes 10 Performance attributes This chapter discusses the performance attributes of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this chapter 10 1 Performance attributes overview on page 250 10 2 LAN interface performance attributes on page 252 10 3 WAN interface performance attributes on page 255 10 4 WAN encapsulation performance attributes on page 256 10 5 Line performance attributes on page 258 10 6 Routing performance attributes on page 261 10 7 L2TP tunnel performance attributes on page 266 10 8 Bridging performance att
109. ange 1 25000 queue is addressed The unit of the quotum bytes or packets can be set with the shdsIRouter router prior ityPolicy countingPolicy attribute This sets the relative importance of the gueue Default 1 Range 1 10 The weight element is only relevant in case the shd slRouter router priorityPolicy Jalgorithm attribute is set to absolutePriority or weightedFair Queueing kal shdsIRouter router priorityPolicy lowdelayQuotum Default 50 Range 1 25000 This sets the number of bytes packets that is degueued from the low delay queue when the queue is addressed For more information on the low delay queue refer to 5 11 2 What is a priority queue on page 109 The unit of the quotum bytes or packets can be set with the shdsIRouter router priorityPolicy JcountingPolicy attribute Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 51111 User manual Step by step configuration 5 11 7 Configuring the traffic policy shdsiRouter router trafficPolicy method Default trafficShaping Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to choose a method for redirecting the data to a specific queue The method attribute has the following values trafficShaping The data is redirected to the queues based on the settings of the attribute shd slRouter router trafficPolicy trafficShaping tosDiffServ The data is redirected to the queues based on DiffServ ref
110. ansmits and receives RIP updates on all interfaces The ripMode attribute has the following values active RIP updates are transmitted and received on this interface passive RIP updates are not transmitted on this interface but received updates are parsed disabled RIP updates are nor transmitted nor received on this interface 76 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration RIP authentication RIPv2 provides the possibility to authenticate the routing updates You can configure this using e the rip2Authentication attribute in the interface objects for more information refer to shdsIRouter laninter face rip2Authentication on page 154 the ripv2SecretTable attribute in the router object for more information refer to shdsIRouter router ripv2SecretTable on page 176 Other advanced attributes to tune RIP are e the metric attribute in the interface objects for more information refer to shdslRouter lanInterface metric on page 153 e the splitHorizon attribute in the WAN interface object for more information refer to shdslRouter waninter face splitHorizon on page 161 the ripUpdatelnterval attribute in the router object for more information refer to shdslRouter router ripUp datelnterval on page 176 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 77 User manual Step by step configuration 5 8 Configuring NAT and PAT This section explains Network Address Translation NAT an
111. ated in Frame Relay RFC 1490 ppp The IP packets are encapsulated in PPP x25 The IP packets are encapsulated in X 25 status This is the route status Possible values are up The route can be used down The route is currently not in use discard Packets for this destination are discarded 234 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 Reference manual Status attributes KES osempion O preference This displays the route preference If more than one route matches the IP destination address this attribute deter mines which route is used The route with the lowest preference value will be used This is the type of the route Possible values are This is a host route i e a route to a single IP address instead of a complete network This is also used for the router its own IP address internal A route with this status is irrelevant local This route is for directly connected networks rip This route has been received by a RIP update static This route has been configured i e it is a static route metric If two routes exist with the same preference then the route with the lowest metric value is chosen The metric attribute serves as a cost for using the route In most cases it indicates the number of hops routers required to reach a destination timeOut In case of a RIP route the timeOut attribute displays the time the route will remain in the routing table if no RIP
112. ation is PPP with active link monitoring IP address WAN interface IP address WAN interface 192 168 100 1 192 168 100 2 IP address LAN interface 192 168 47 254 Router modem G703 intf IP subnet 192 168 48 0 mask 255 255 255 0 IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 The configuration of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router in CLI format is as follows ACTION Load Default Configuration SET SELECT lanInterface LIST ipAddress 192 168 47 254 SELECT wanInterface LIST ipAddress 192 168 100 1 encapsulation ppp SELECT ppp ka linkMonitoring operation enabled SELECT router LIST routingTable a network 192 168 48 0 gateway 192 168 100 2 ACTION Activate Configuration Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 121 User manual Configuration examples 6 2 LAN extension over a Frame Relay network In this example a remote office is connected to a central office over a Frame Relay network A modem link connects the remote office to the Frame Relay network At the local office a Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is installed The central router is a third party router The Frame Relay network uses LMI according to the ANSI standard No inverse ARP is supported by the network IP address WAN interface IP address WAN interface 192 168 100 1 192 168 100 2 serial intf Router DLCI 19 IP subnet 192 1
113. b system picture 12 TMA sub system picture The sub system picture is a TMA tool that visualises the status information ofthe Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router This chapter explains how to display the sub system picture and how to interpret the visual indi cations How to display the sub system picture To display the sub system picture of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router click on the sub system picture button located in the TMA toolbar a Structure of the sub system picture This paragraph displays and labels the different elements ofthe sub system picture It also explains how the visual indications should be interpreted Below the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router sub system picture is displayed E TMA comirel0 iof x TELINDUS 1420 SHDSL Router TST T1X2G K DO LN cone COLD XD EXD The following table gives an overview of the sub system picture elements and what they indicate Description LED indicators These reflect the actual status of the device The LED indication on the sub system picture corresponds with the LED indication on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router itself For more information on the interpre tation of the LEDs refer to 2 6 The front panel LED indicators on page 26 interfaces This reflects the status of the interfaces The possible indications are There is no alarm active in the corresponding interface object An alarm is active in the corresponding interface object The colours of the interface
114. ble with the HDLC encapsula tion on the Crocus Bridge interface It is however not compatible with the Cisco HDLC encapsulation 10 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 1 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 1 4 Routing The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router supports IP routing using static routes and the RIP version 2 routing protocol Simple access lists can be applied on both the LAN and the WAN interfaces NAT and PAT Network Address Translation NAT and Port Address Translation PAT are supported These are two features that help solve the lack of official IP version 4 addresses They are also known as IP masquer ading NAT allows the use of private IP addresses on the local Ethernet while still having access via the WAN interface to the Internet official IP addresses Each Ethernet IP address that needs Internet access is translated into an official IP address before sending traffic on the WAN interface The number of simultaneous users with Intemet access is limited to the number of official IP addresses This is a dynamic process PAT uses only one single official IP address on the WAN network The Tel indus 1420 SHDSL Router translates all private IP addresses on the local Ethernet to the single official IP address Only outgoing TCP sessions are supported NAT and PAT You can combine both translation methods and tune them to specific needs l q Instead of using official IP addresses on the WAN and pr
115. bridging Enables or disables bridging on the interface Default disabled Range enabled disabled priority Each port of a bridge has a unigue port identifier The priority attribute is a part of this port identifier and allows you to change the priority of the port Itis taken as the more significant part in priority comparisons Default 128 Range 0 255 The other part of the unique port identifier has a fixed relationship to the physical or logical port This assures the uniqueness of the unique port identifier among the ports of a single bridge For more information on port priority refer to 5 9 7 What is Spanning Tree priority and cost on page 98 pathCost This is the value that is added to the total cost of the path to the root bridge provided that this particular port is a root port i e that the path to the root goes through this port Default 100 Range 1 65535 For more information on path cost refer to 5 9 7 What is Spanning Tree priority and cost on page 98 topologyChange Detection Enables or disables the communication of Spanning Tree topology changes to the root bridge Default enabled Range enabled disabled If a change in topology is detected by or notified to the bridge via this port enabled then the bridge communicates this to the root bridge disabled then the bridge does not communicate this to the root brid
116. btain its IP Range enumerated see below address in case you do not configure it yourself The autolnstallMode attribute has the following values unnumbered The WAN interface uses the LAN IP address In this case e Ifan IP address is present on the LAN interface then no auto install or any other method of automatically obtaining an IP address is used e Ifno IP address is configured on the LAN interface then BootP is used on the LAN interface and the auto install sequence is started on the WAN interface numbered autolnstall The WAN interface uses the configured IP address If no IP address has been entered then the interface is not present The WAN interface automatically obtains its IP address Then it continues with the seguence e DNS request TFTP configuration download e activate configuration The WAN interface automatically obtains its IP address Easy IP is a new twist to auto install over PPP With easy IP the WAN interface obtains its IP address through IPCP easylpPat The WAN interface automatically obtains its IP address and uses that address as PAT address The IP address obtained through easy IP is used as PAT address to provide Inter net access to all users on the local network of the router This means that the LAN interface is fully configured including an active DHCP server However each time the WAN link goes down the WAN interface address is renegotiated
117. ce then the packet is encapsulated in PPP first then L2TP UDP and finally IP outer IP Then the packet goes through the routing decision process again This time using the outer IP header The packet is routed over the Internet using the outer IP header The packet is received in the tunnel s end point where it is then routed again using the original IP header 104 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration 5 10 2 L2TP terminology The following table gives some specific L2TP terminology L2TP Access Con centrator LAC Anode that acts as one side of an L2TP tunnel It is a peer to the L2TP Network Server LNS Packets sent from the LAC to the LNS require tunnelling with the L2TP protocol L2TP Network Server LNS A node that acts as one side of an L2TP tunnel It is a peer to the L2TP Access Concentrator LAC The LNS is the logical termination point of a PPP session that is being tunnelled from the remote system by the LAC Tunnel A tunnel exists between a LAC LNS pair The tunnel consists of a Control Con nection and zero or more L2TP sessions The tunnel carries encapsulated PPP datagrams and Control Messages between the LAC and the LNS Control Connection A control connection operates in band over a tunnel to control the establish ment release and maintenance of sessions and of the tunnel itself Control Messages Control messages
118. ch bank DS1 position 1 to on Properly replace the cover and reconnect the power supply 306 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 14 Reference manual Downloading firmware 14 4 Downloading firmware using TFTP When downloading with TMA over an IP link you actually evoke TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol through TMA You can also use TFTP without opening TMA l q Downloading firmware using TFTP is only possible when the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is equipped with two flash memory banks Check the status attribute shdslRouter flashVersions to find out how many flash banks your Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router contains Start a TFTP session on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router For example by typing tftp 10 0 11 1 atthe command prompt of your UNIX station where 10 0 11 1 isthe LAN IP address of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Set the following TFTP parameters Set the retransmission time out to at least 20 seconds The syntax to do this is typi cally rexmt 20 Set the total TFTP time out sufficiently large e g 40 seconds The syntax to do this is typically timeout 40 Set the transfer mode to binary octet format The syntax to do this is typically binary or octet Type the following command tftp gt put Txxxxxxx 00 CONTROL my_pwd Where put is the TFTP command to send a file Txxxxxxx 00 is the firmware file e g T1234001 00 CONTROL in capitals is the destination flash memory my_pwd is the write
119. chanism In this case the queues are emptied based on their weight The weight can be configured in the shdsIRouter router priorityPolicy queueConfigurations attribute Example Suppose queue 1 has weight 2 queue 2 has weight 1 and both queues contain data In that case the queues are emptied in the following order queue 1 queue 1 gt queue 2 queue 1 queue 1 queue 2 etc The options roundRobin absolutePriority and weightedFairQueueing are priority queuing mechanisms In order to determine which data goes into which priority queue use the shdsIRouter router trafficPolicy method attribute The queues themselves can be configured using the shdsIRouter router priorityPolicy queueConfigu rations attribute Chapter 5 109 110 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration shdsIRouter router priorityPolicy countingPolicy Default bytes Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to define whether the quotum of the queues is expressed in bytes or packets shdsiRouter router priorityPolicy queueConfigurations Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to set the relative importance of the user configurable queues The queueConfigurations table contains the following elements ee eee quotum This sets the number of bytes packets that is Default 1500 dequeued from the user configurable queue when the R
120. check the following steps w KKK Check whether the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is operational If the front panel LEDs light up and if you can connect TMA it is working Check the cable that connects the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router with the line WAN Is it connected ls it connect at both sides Check whether the link towards the WAN network is up If the WAN link is up but no data traffic passes and you use e Frame Relay encapsulation then check the Frame Relay status attributes PPP encapsulation then check the PPP status attributes Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 135 User manual Troubleshooting 7 6 How to check the Frame Relay status If the connection to the Frame Relay network is not operational you could verify the LMI protocol or the DLCI table of your WAN interface Do this by checking the following attributes shdsIRouter laninterface frameRelay lmi This attribute gives a complete LMI status information overview The most important elements of the Imi structure are This displays the current state of LMI Possible values are LMI messages can and are exchanged No LMI messages can be exchanged lastStateChange This is the system up time when the LMI state entered its current state l e the moment the value of the state element changes from up to down or vice versa the system up time value is written into the lastStateChange element shdsiRouter lanin
121. ched through the serial inter face discard Packets for this destination are discarded preference This defines the level of importance of the route with respect to routes learnt via RIP Default 10 Range 1 200 RIP routes always have a preference of 60 Routes with a lower preference value are chosen over routes with higher preference value ra shdslRouter router routingProtocol Default none Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual 175 Configuration attributes ks 121 STSEENE This determines with how much the metric parameter Default of a route is incremented Range 1 15 metric If two routes exist with the same preference then the route with the lowest metric value is chosen This element is only important when combining static routes and RIP routes For more information on the metric element refer to the configuration attribute shd sIRouter laninterface metric on page 153 Use this attribute to activate or deactivate the Routing Information Protocol RIP The routingProtocol att Range enumerated see below ribute has the following values No routing protocol is used Only static routes are used The RIP version 2 routing protocol is used shdsiRouter router alternativeRoutes Default backup Use this attribute to determine how the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router deals with identical routes If more than o
122. configuration attributes 204 performance attributes 268 status attributes 246 management interface specifi cations 312 management terminology an introduction 41 management tools connection possibilities 15 introduction 14 managing the device 37 manual organisation iv mechanical dimensions 313 motherboard position of the DIP switches and straps 32 N NAT basic configuration 89 introduction 80 what is 80 when use 81 why use 80 NAT address table how works the 89 NAT and PAT basic configuration 79 combining 91 NAT on the LAN interface a re mark 90 Index 0 object what is 42 operating system performance attributes 270 status attributes 247 organisation of this manual iv overview alarm attributes 274 configuration attributes 144 performance attributes 250 status attributes 210 over voltage and over current protection compliance 313 P parts of the device 24 passwords entering 148 remarks on 147 PAT basic configuration 85 how works 82 introduction 80 limitation workaround 87 limitations 86 87 what is 80 when use 81 why use 80 PAT and NAT combining 91 PAT what does 82 performance attributes 249 bridging 267 L2TP tunnel 266 LAN interface 252 line 258 management 268 operating system 270 overview 250 routing 261 WAN encapsulation 256 WAN interface 255 policy object adding a 110 power requirements 313 PPP basic configuration 63 configuration attributes 168 i
123. continuously off Nothing is connected to the LAN interface monitoring The Ethernet link is up The LED goes out for a fixed time when a user data frame is sent on the LAN interface continuously on The Ethernet link is up No user data is sent on the LAN interface 2 6 7 The LAN receive data LED LAN RXD This LED monitors the received user data on the LAN interface continuously off No user data is received on the LAN interface monitoring The LED lights up for a fixed time when a user data frame is received on the LAN interface 2 6 8 The collision LED COL This LED monitors the collisions on the LAN continuously off No collisions are detected on the LAN monitoring The LED lights up every time a collision is detected on the LAN Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 3 31 User manual DIP switches and straps of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 3 DIP switches and straps of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router This chapter locates the DIP switches and straps on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router motherboard It gives an overview of their function and it explains how to change their settings The following gives an overview of this chapter e 3 1 The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router motherboard on page 32 e 3 2 DIP switches of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router on page 33 e 3 3 Straps of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router on page 34 e 3 4 Changing DIP switch and strap settings on page 35 32 Telindus 1420 SHDSL R
124. cratch then use this action to revert to the default configuration shdsIRouter Cold Boot If you execute this action the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router reboots As a result the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router performs a self test e checks the firmware e reads the saved configuration and restarts program execution When use this action Use this action for instance to activate new firmware 152 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual 8 3 LAN interface configuration attributes Chapter 8 Configuration attributes ra shdsIRouter laninterface ipAddress Use this attribute to assign an IP address to the interface The address should belong to the subnet the interface is connected to ra shdsiRouter laninterface ipNetMask Use this attribute to assign an IP subnet mask to the interface The subnet Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 Default 255 255 255 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 mask defines the number of IP devices that may be present on the corresponding IP segment ra shdslRouter laninterface secundarylpAddresses Use this attribute to create additional virtual networks on the same Ethernet interface The secundarylpAddresses table contains the following elements Default lt empty gt Range table see below mon pe O O OO OS ipAddress Use this attribute to assign an IP address to the inter face The address should belong to the subnet the interface
125. cuit PVC to the customer This means a complete path is set up between the ISP and the customer To this path a DLCI number is assigned in the Frame Relay node closest to modem Y In the example above this DLCI number is 19 The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router A learns this DLCI number from the Frame Relay node closest to modem Y through LMI PVC status inguiries In case onthe WAN interface no ipAddress is configured i e still at its default value AND the configuration attribute autolnstallMode is set to unnumbered and on the LAN interface no ipAddress or ipNetMask is configured i e still at their default value OR any other value then the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router A starts sending BootP requests on the Frame Relay DLCI 290 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router JU JE Nr The central router Z answers these reguests acting as a BootP server The answer is based on its static IP address to DLCI mapping The central router Z looks for the IP address that maps the DLCI number where the BootP request was received It sends this IP address back as the IP address for the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router A This implementation is compatible with another Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router or a Cisco router starting from IOS 10 3 as central router The Cisco router however must have an IP helper address on its WAN interface before it
126. d Port Address Translation PAT Firstly it gives an introduction Secondly a table is presented that will help you to determine which translation method meets your requirements Then this section teaches you how to configure NAT and PAT The following gives an overview of this section 5 8 1 Introducing NAT and PAT on page 80 e 5 8 2 When use NAT and or PAT on page 81 5 8 3 How does PAT work on page 82 5 8 4 Configuring PAT on page 85 5 8 5 PAT limitations on page 86 5 8 6 Configuring NAT on page 89 5 8 7 Combining PAT and NAT on page 91 78 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration 5 8 1 Introducing NAT and PAT What is NAT and PAT Network Address Translation NAT and Port Address Translation PAT are used to translate private IP addresses into official IP addresses If you use the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router to have a permanent connection to the Internet you may need NAT and or PAT If you do not need address translation you may skip this section Why use NAT and PAT Each device connected to the Internet must have an Official i e unique IP address The success of the Internet has caused a lack of these official IP addresses As a result your Internet Service Provider ISP may offer you only one or a small number of official IP addresses If the number of IP devices on your local network is larger than the number of official IP addresses you can ass
127. d a default gateway refer to 5 3 Configuring IP addresses on page 54 Click on the Next gt button After a couple of seconds the attributes of the selected Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router appear in the TMA window Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 41 User manual Managing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 4 4 Introducing the management terminology This section introduces the terminology concerning the management of a Telindus device It explains terms such as containment tree group object attribute value and action Graphical representation of the containment tree The most comprehensible graphical representation of the containment tree is given in TMA The follow ing figure depicts the TMA window containing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router containment tree TMA Router ojx Connect Edit View Tools Help Alella 218 olo ead a xl Containment tree crocusRouter2M Ef Configuration Status 2 Performance G Alarms Groups Containment tree Name ge Valus Attributes sysName gt sysContact gt sysLocation gt bootFromFlasH auto Attribute values gt security lt Table gt gt EEE 000000011 h alarmLevel Argument Name Argument Value Activate Configuration gt Load Saved Configuration A gt Load Default Configuration Actions Cold Boot Objects fotResponding alarmSyncLoss enabled configChanged disabled access disabled unknown
128. ddresses June LAC LNS L2TP Access NI i L2TP Network Concentrator Server Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 1 13 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 1 7 Auto install The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router supports a number of features that allow it to be auto installed either over its Ethernet interface or over the WAN interface Automatically obtaining an IP address If no IP address is configured on the LAN interface the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router sends BootP reguests on its LAN interface to obtain an IP address from a BootP server If connected to a Frame Relay network the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router learns its DLCI number via LMI status messages If no IP address is configured on both the LAN and WAN interfaces it sends BootP requests over this DLCI If the remote router is a Cisco router or another Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router it acts as a BootP server and returns the IP address If connected over a PPP link and no IP address is configured on both the LAN and WAN interfaces the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router learns its IP address from the IPCP handshake TFTP configuration Once an IP address is assigned the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is reachable for further configuration Alternatively it may retrieve its full configuration from a TFTP server Using the IP address assignment over the WAN link installation of a Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router on a remote location is plug and play It can be completely pre
129. decide which data goes into which priority queue There are 7 priority queues Queue Queue type Description configurable queue The user can decide which data goes into which queue low delay queue This queue is always addressed between every user config urable queue system queue This queue is filled with link monitoring messages etc and has priority over all other queues 5 11 3 Queuing routed and bridged data The following table shows how the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router queues routed and bridged data In case is enabled only routing the routed data is gueued as specified in the traffic policy settings routing and bridging the routed data is queued as specified in the traffic policy settings the bridged data is sent to queue 1 only bridging priority queuing is not applicable 5 11 4 What is traffic policy The purpose of a traffic policy is to determine exactly which data is sent to which queue 108 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration 5 11 5 Adding a policy object The priorityPolicy and trafficPolicy objects are not present in the containment tree by default If you want to use priority and traffic policy then you have to add these objects first Proceed as follows Start a management session on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router e g TMA ATWIN CLI etc Go to the router object In case of Proceed as follows Rig
130. defines which action has to be taken when a Default deny packet arrives with a source IP address that falls Range enumerated see below within the specified address range The possible actions are The packet is dropped The packet is forwarded q If you specify one entry or multiple entries for which the action is set to deny then also specify at least one entry for which the action is set to allow Else all packets are dropped 206 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes k shdsIRouter management snmp Default enabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to accept enable or discard disable SNMP reguests kal shdsIRouter managementttelnet Default enabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to accept enable or discard disable Telnet sessions shdslRouter managementitftp Default enabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to accept enable or discard disable TFTP sessions kal shdsIRouter management consoleNoTrafficTimeOut Default 00000d 00h 30m 00s E Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s Use this attribute to automatically close a management session if there is 24855d 03h 14m 075 no user interaction during a certain time out period This time out period can be set with the consoleNoTrafficTimeOut attribute The purpose of such a timer is to protect the Telindus 1420 SHDSL
131. ding ipNetMask dhcpStatistics secondarylpAddresses IPS gt gt gt tunnels ifT ype I2tpTunnels ifMtu SAI las gt gt bridge ifLastChange bridgeCache gt gt gt frameRelay Imi dlciTable cllmLastCongestionCause spanningTree Action clearBridgeCache gt gt management cms2Address Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 211 Reference manual Status attributes gt gt gt loopback ipAddress ifDescr ifType ifSpeed ifMtu ifOperStatus gt gt operatingSystem taskInfo 212 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 Reference manual Status attributes 9 2 General status attributes shdsIRouter sysDescr This attribute is a textual description of the device It is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Example Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Txxxx xxxxx 01 01 00 12 00 In this example the following parameters are visible e Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is the device name TXXXX XXXXX is the firmware code and version 01 01 00 12 00 is the firmware release date and time shdslRouter sysObjectID This attribute is the SNMP identification string This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter shdslRouter sysUpTime This attribute displays the elapsed time since the last power on or cold boot of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router shdslRouter sysServices This attribute is the SNMP service identification This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 213 Reference manual Status attributes shdsl
132. disable the status coupling between the LAN and the WAN interface This is only supported for PPP and Frame Relay If you enable the lanWanStatusCoupling then the WAN interface stops transmitting in case the LAN inter face goes down and vice versa This allows you when using PPP with link monitoring or Frame Relay with LMI to let a complete link go down in case one element of the link goes down shds Router lanInterface lt configurationAlarmAttributes gt For more information on the configuration alarm attributes alarmMask and alarmLevel and on the alarms in general refer to 11 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 275 For more information on the alarms of the laninterface object refer to 11 4 LAN interface alarms on page 279 160 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes 8 4 WAN interface configuration attributes Several configuration attributes of the WAN interface are the same as on the LAN interface Therefore they are not explained here again These attributes are ipAddress ipNetMask secondarylpAddresses metric ripMode rip2Authentication accessList extendedAccessList bridgeAccessList directedBroadcasts and ipHelpers For a complete description of these attributes refer to 8 3 LAN interface configuration attributes on page 152 shdslRouter wanInterface autolnstallMode Default unnumbered Use this attribute to determine how the WAN interface will o
133. dress Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 183 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdslRouter router natAddresses Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to define all the official IP addresses Entering an address in the table automatically enables NAT The natAddresses table contains the following elements E TENE officialAddress This is the official IP address These addresses are used in the reverse order as they appear in the list privateAddress This is the private IP address Use this element to permanently assign an official IP address to a private address For more information on NAT refer to 5 8 Configuring NAT and PAT on page 77 shdslRouter router natGateways Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to define the gateway addresses from routes on which NAT or PAT should be applied shdsIRouter router natTcpSocketTimeOut Default 00001d 00h 00m 00s R 00000d 00h 00m 00s Use this attribute to define the time out for TCP sessions that are not closed ange 24855d 03h ri a by the application Such sessions whether PAT or NAT is in use remain active for one day by default Only decrease this attribute if some TCP applications do not close properly filling up the available translation sessions shdsIRouter router natUdpSocketTimeOut Default 00000d 00h 03m 00s R 00000d 00h 0 0s Use this
134. dress Compliance BootP complies with RFC 951 DHCP complies with RFCs 2131 and 2132 In both protocols the client IP device sends a limited broadcast reguest on its interfaces reguesting an IP address The reguest contains the client its MAC address which is a unigue identifier refer to the status attribute shdsIRouter laninterface macAddress BootP A workstation with a BootP server interprets incoming BootP requests You can configure a file on the server with MAC address and IP address subnet mask pairs for all devices in the network you want to service If the MAC address in the BootP request matches a MAC address in this file the BootP server replies with the corresponding IP address and subnet mask Assigning an IP address in this way is done through a simple request response handshake A workstation with a DHCP server works in a similar way as with a BootP server The difference with BootfP is that you can additionally configure a list of IP addresses on the server These IP addresses are dynamically assigned to the IP devices requesting an IP address independently of their MAC address Those address assignments are limited in time Assigning an IP address in this way is done through a 4 way handshake and with regular renewals The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router as relay agent Being broadcast packets BootP and DHCP requests can cross a router using IP helper addresses The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is a BootP and DHCP
135. e For more information refer to the status attribute shdslRouter laninterface bridgePortStatus on page 218 232 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 Reference manual Status attributes 9 6 Line status attributes shdsIRouter wanlnterface line ifDescr This is the interface description This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter shdsiRouter wanlnterfacel line ifType This is the interface type This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter shdslRouter wanInterface line ifSpeed In case the attribute ifOperStatus is up the attribute ifSpeed displays the current line speed in bits per second bps e g 1152000 e down the attribute ifSpeed becomes 0 shdsIRouter waninterface line ifOperStatus This attribute displays the current operation status ofthe line Possible values are up The line is up data transfer is possible This is in case the value ofthe attribute linePair 1 status is dataState down The line is down data transfer is not possible testing A line test is active shdsiRouter wanlnterface line linePair 1 timeSinceLastRetrain This attribute displays the elapsed time since the last retrain cycle shdslRouter wanInterface line linePair 1 status This attribute displays the status of the line Possible values are idle No link is present training A training cycle is in progress dataState A data link is present shdsiRouter wanlnterface line linePair 1 lineAttenuatio
136. e up to 255 255 255 255 local This address is used in the response on an Inverse Default 0 0 0 0 ARP request received on the DLCI Range up to 255 255 255 255 The local attribute is optional and only needs to be defined in case secondary IP addresses are used on the Frame Relay WAN interface bridgePortlnfo This sets the bridging attributes of the Frame Relay Pefault WAN interface Range structure see below For more information refer to the configuration attribute shdsIRouter laninterface bridgePortInfo on page 157 166 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdsIRouter waninterface frameRelay Imi Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to select the Local Management Interface LMI protocol and to fine tune the LMI operation The LMI provides a status mechanism which gives an on going status report on the DLCls These status reports are exchanged between the Frame Relay access device or Frame Relay DTE and Frame Relay node or Frame Relay DCE At regular intervals the DTE sends Full Status Enguiry messages to the DCE The DCE answers with the status of all its DLCls on the interface At smaller intervals the DTE sends Status Enquiry messages In that case the DCE only answers with DLCI status changes The Imi structure contains the following elements ES ce This is the LMI variant There are
137. e 152 line 171 management 204 overview 144 PPP 168 priority policy 192 routing 172 SNMP proxy 202 traffic policy 194 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Annex WAN encapsulation 163 WAN interface 160 configuration examples 119 configuration file creating 294 creating a binary 296 creating an ASCII 297 using CLI get 299 using TFTP get 298 formats 295 configuration settings reading the 48 configuration type active 150 default 150 non active 150 connecting a LAN tothe Inter net using NAT and PAT a configuration example 122 connecting the device 22 an example 25 connecting the different parts of the device 24 connecting with TMA over an IP network 40 through the auxiliary con nector 39 containment tree of the device 44 terminology 42 what is 42 conventions graphical vii typographical vi copyright notice ii creating a binary configuration file 296 a configuration file 294 an ASCII configuration file 297 using CLI get 299 using TFTP get 298 D default configuration loading the 51 default route an example 71 DHCP 286 what is 286 DHCP server reaction on a BootP request 186 DHCP versus BoofP releasing IP addresses 186 DIP switch configuration table reading a 49 DIP switches changing the settings 35 DIP switch bank DS1 33 overview 33 DIP switches and straps 31 position on the motherboard 32 DLCI what is 58 document conventions graphical vii typographical vi
138. e 254 259 322 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Annex iflnDiscards 252 iflnErrors 252 iflnNUcastPkts 252 ifInOctets 252 iflnUcastPkts 252 ifinUnknownProtos 252 ifOutDiscards 253 ifOutErrors 253 ifOutNUcastPkts 253 ifOutOctets 252 ifOutQLen 253 ifOutUcastPkts 252 I2tpTunnels 266 largestFreeBlockSize 270 line 258 lineParameters 260 Imi 256 natAddressesAvailable 262 natAllocFails 262 natDiscards 262 natlempAllocs 263 natlempSocketsUsed 263 natSocketsFree 262 natTcpAllocs 263 natTcpSocketsUsed 263 natUdpAllocs 263 natUdpSocketsUsed 263 performance 260 pingResults 264 routingTable 261 taskInfo 271 tcpSessionCount 269 tftpSessionCount 268 totalDataBuffers 270 totalMemory 271 usedProcPower 270 attribute status activeFlash 213 arpCache 217 bcpHisOptions 229 bcpMyOptions 229 bcpState 226 bootVersion 213 bridgeCache 243 bridgePortStatus 218 cllmLastCongestionCause 225 cms2Address 246 configurationSaving 214 deviceld 214 dhcpBinding 235 dhcpStatistics 236 diciTable 224 flash1Version 213 flash2Version 213 flashVersions 213 hisAuthenstate 230 ifDescr 215 232 246 ifLastChange 216 ifMtu 215 246 ifOperStatus 133 216 220 232 246 ifSpeed 215 232 ifType 215 232 246 ipAddress 215 246 ipAdEntBcastAddr 218 ipAdEntReasmMaxSize 218 ipcpHisOptions 228 ipcoMyOptions 228 ipcpState 226 ipNetMask 215 I2tpTunnels 237 IcpHisOptions 227 IcpMyOptions 227 IcpState 226 lineAttenuation 232 Imi 222 macAddress
139. e Frame Relay DTEs and DCEs One such a type of packets is the Full Status Enquiry message At regular intervals The DTE sends Full Status Enquiry messages to the DCE The DCE answers with the status of all its DLCls on the interface At smaller intervals the DTE sends Status Enquiry messages In that case the DCE only answers with DLCI status changes shdslRouter wanInterface frameRelay mi Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to select the Local Management Interface LMI protocol and to fine tune the LMI operation The Imi structure contains the following elements Fa E This is the LMI variant There are several standards __ Default q933 Annex A for the LMI protocol with small variations between Range enumerated see below them Therefore you should configure the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router according to the standard that is used by your service pro vider The type attribute has the following values noLmiConfigured No LMI is used ImiRev1 Set this value only for compatibility with older equip ment ansit1 617 d Set this value for ANSI LMI compliance q933 Annex A Set this value for ITU T LMI compliance pollinginterval This defines the time between successive Status Default 00000d 00h 00m 10s Enquiry messages Range 00000d 00h 00m 05s 00000d 00h 00m 30s 62 User manual Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 Step by step configurat
140. e and response received from a peer does not match the tunnel is not opened To participate in tunnel authentication a single shared secret has to exist between the LAC and LNS tunnelSecret This is used in the tunnel authentication in order to Default lt empty gt verify the peer its response Range max 64 characters maxNrOfRetrans This sets the number of times a control message has pefault 4 missions to be retransmitted in case no acknowledgement fol Range 0 10 lows before the tunnel is closed transmitWindowSize This defines the window size for transmitting control pefault 4 messages Range 1 30 receiveWindowSize This defines the window size for receiving control Default 4 messages Range 1 30 udpChecksum L2TP is encapsulated in IP UDP This enables on or Default off disables off the UDP checksum Range on off It is recommended to enable the UDP checksum on lower quality links 192 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes 8 9 Priority policy configuration attributes The priorityPolicy object is not present in the containment tree by default If you want to use priority policy then you have to add this object first Refer to 5 11 5 Adding a policy object on page 108 shds lRouter router priorityPolicy J algorithm Default fifo Range enumerated see below Use this attrib
141. e front The following figure clarifies this A N N N O lt lt flex cable Change the DIP switch and or strap settings Carefully replace the cover and close tight Fasten the four screw located at the bottom of the housing Reconnect the external power supply 36 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 3 User manual DIP switches and straps of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 37 User manual Managing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 4 Managing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Once you installed the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router you can proceed with the configuration of the Tel indus 1420 SHDSL Router You can do this using any of the management tools introduced in 1 8 Man agement tools on page 14 This chapter briefly highlights one of those management tools the Telindus Maintenance Application TMA This chapter introduces TMA and describes how to start a session on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Furthermore it gives an introduction to the management attributes of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this chapter e 4 1 Introducing TMA on page 38 e 4 2 Connecting through the auxiliary connector on page 39 e 4 3 Connecting over an IP network on page 40 4 4 Introducing the management terminology on page 41 4 5 The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router containment tree on page 44 4 6 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router attribute ove
142. e gateway address the IP address of the router at the ISP In the network depicted in Example of a network topology for Internet connection on page 82 the natGateways table should only contain the gateway addresses 195 7 12 254 However if you already defined your defaultRoute to be 195 7 12 254 then you can leave the natGateways table empty This because if the natGateways table is empty then the defaultRoute is taken as only gateway addresses 84 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration 5 8 5 PAT limitations Example of PAT and multiple remote networks over Frame Relay Now consider the following network topology Your network is connected to the Internet via a Frame Relay network and to another site that does not have official IP addresses either Now you can choose whether to apply PAT to e all traffic towards the Frame Relay network or e the traffic destined for the Internet only IP address WAN interface 195 7 12 22 IP address LAN interface 192 168 47 254 your site IP address WAN interface 195 7 12 254 ISP f AA Internet Frame Relay or PDH SDH network IP subnet 192 168 48 0 mask 255 255 255 0 modem IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 other site IP address WAN interface 195 7 12 23 In this example PAT is only used for the traffic destined for the Internet In that case the configuration o
143. e ideal root bridge By increasing the bridge priority lowering the numerical priority value of the ideal bridge so that it becomes the root bridge you force a Spanning Tree recalculation to form a new spanning tree topology with the ideal bridge as the root port priority and When the spanning tree topology is calculated based on default parameters the path cost path between source and destination stations in a bridged network might not be ideal The goal is to make the fastest link the root port For example assume on Bridge B that port 1 currently the root port is an unshielded twisted pair link e port 2 is a fibre optic link Network traffic might be more efficient over the high speed fibre optic link By changing the spanning tree port priority or path cost for port 2 to a higher priority lower numerical value than port 1 port 2 becomes the root port Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 99 User manual Step by step configuration 5 9 8 Setting Spanning Tree priorities and costs Setting the bridge priority shdslRouter bridge spanningTree bridgePriority Default 32768 Range 0 65535 The bridgePriority element of the spanningTree structure forms a unique bridge identifier together with the bridge its MAC address This identifier is used to determine which bridge becomes the root bridge The bridge with the lowest bridgePriority value becomes the root bridge If two bridges have the sa
144. e official IP address These addresses are used in the reverse order as they appear in the list privateAddress This is the private IP address Use this element to permanently assign an official IP address to a private address How does the NAT address table work If a local station sends data to the Internet for the first time NAT looks for an unused official IP address It assigns this official IP address to the local station The amount of local stations that can have simulta neous Internet access equals the amount of NAT addresses you defined If all sessions between a local station and the Internet have been closed by the application in case of TCP or because of time outs then the previously assigned official IP address is freed for another local station Optionally the NAT address entry may contain a corresponding private IP address This allows to per manently assign an official IP address to a local station This is useful for stations or servers that should have Internet access at all times Another example of permanently assigned official IP addresses is a network where only a limited number of users has Internet access NAT only converts IP addresses and thus allows traffic in both directions However incoming traffic on one of the official IP addresses can only be forwarded to the local network if a corresponding private IP address has been configured Example of a natAddresses table In this example the first add
145. e table contains the following elements aS E SINNA interface This is the interface through which the station with the MAC address as displayed in the macAddress element can be reached macAddress This is the MAC address of a station on the bridged LAN type This displays whether the corresponding MAC address is static or dynamic dynamic The corresponding MAC address is learned on one of the interfaces static There are only two static entries the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router its own MAC address e a MAC address used for Spanning Tree This is the elapsed time since a frame was received from the station with the MAC address as displayed in the macAddress element 244 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 Reference manual Status attributes shdsiRouter bridge spanningTree This attribute gives you status information on the Spanning Tree The spanningTree structure contains the following elements C ENNE designatedPriority designatedMAC Together these two elements form the unigue bridge identifier They display the unique bridge identifier of the root bridge as it is indicated in the root identifier parameter of the Configuration BPDUs These BPDUs are transmit ted by the designated bridge for the LAN that is currently connected to this port This bridge identifier is used to test the value of the root identifier parameter con veyed in received Configuration BPDUs rootPathCo
146. earning state the port continues to block frame forwarding as it learns station location infor mation for the forwarding database 4 The port waits for the expiration of the forward delay timer and then moves the port to the forwarding state where both learning and forwarding are enabled 202 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual 8 12 SNMP proxy configuration attributes Chapter 8 Configuration attributes ra shdslRouter snmpProxy trapDestinations Use this attribute to define to which IP address the SNMP traps have to be sent Default lt empty gt Range table see below The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router translates all alarm status changes into SNMP traps These traps can then be sent to a management system To enable this configure in the trapDestinations table the IP addresses to which the traps have to be sent If the trapDestinations table is empty then no traps are sent The trapDestinations table contains the following elements mow pe address This is the IP address of the management station to which the SNMP trap messages have to be sent Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 community This is the community string which is included in the SNMP traps that are sent to the management station Itis used as a password in the SNMP communication Give it the same value as on your SNMP management station Default public Range max 20 characters Telindus 1420 S
147. eband modem with a built in IP router Power reguirements The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router reguires 9 Vdc as input voltage Using different power adapters the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router can be powered with 48 Vdc 115 Vac or 230 Vac Physical interfaces The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router has three physical interfaces e aLAN interface LAN This is a 10 Mbps TPI Ethernet interface aline interface LINE The S HDSL line interface supports speeds up to 2 3 Mbps an auxiliary interface AUX This interface can be used to serially connect TMA or using any terminal emulation program also ATWIN and CLI For serial firmware downloads TML is used Self test The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router does a complete self test during power up Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 1 5 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 1 2 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router applications The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router allows the direct connection of 10 BaseT Ethernet LANs via a WAN It routes IP traffic and encapsulates it in PPP Frame Relay HDLC on the WAN link The product can be used to implement e LAN to LAN connection over a galvanic copper line or fibre line e LAN extension over a PDH or SDH backbone e LAN extension over a Frame Relay network LAN to Internet connection Point to point LAN interconnection aa mia LAN gt T T LAN extension over a PDH or SDH backbone LAN extension over a Frame Relay networ
148. ed as follows KE po Connect a serial port of your com puter e g COM1 through a straight DB9 male female cable with the auxiliary connector of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Open a DOS window on your computer Go to the directory where the TML executable is located Typically this is C Program Files TMA Place the firmware file you want to download in this directory Type the following command tml c1 v b f Txxxxxxx 00 CONTROL my_ pwd where tml is the executable Telindus Memory Loader to download files to the Telindus devices through their auxiliary port c1 specifies the COM port of the computer connected to the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router in this example COM1 v returns graphical information on the download status b puts the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router in boot mode This is only necessary when your Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is eguipped with one flash bank only Check the status attribute shdslRouter flashVersions to find out how many flash banks your Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router contains ETxxxxxxx 00 is the firmware file you want to download e g T1234001 00 CONTROL in capitals specifies that the destination is a flash bank ofthe Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router my_pwd is the write access password as configured in the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router If no password has been configured you may omit the and the password To see a list of all the possible TML options type TmL in your
149. eect deans maseka da halama kannata Data sucker Dak 144 8 2 General configuration attributes ueannnnnnsennenetnnaenenannneatatnananannee vana 146 8 3 LAN interface configuration attributes wremanraas 152 8 4 WAN interface configuration attributes wwrrnnarrras 160 8 5 WAN encapsulation configuration attributes 0 nrrrs 163 8 6 Line configuration attributes kas isi nivalis erakanal atakk debi bbeedonas tues 171 8 7 Routing configuration attributes wnterrrrnnnnennrs 172 8 8 L2TP tunnel configuration attributes rsenrannnmenenentneanannananenannn a 188 8 9 Priority policy configuration attributeSi sesedsititu atakse in tadeandoadlaneotteendeaesiaenateeen 192 8 10 Traffic policy configuration attributes wtrerrnrnrs 194 8 11 Bridging configuration attributes unmsneenetevannaneneneenenananaaaanenenen ama 198 8 12 SNMP proxy configuration attributes wettrrnarrrs 202 8 13 Management configuration attributes ernrnennes 204 9 Status attrib teS 5000 iial ank v ka 209 9 1 Status attribute overview 145 sieve tse eeneki taal kanada lad vaata seljale at 210 9 2 General status attributes ak mass anni hk 212 9 3 LAN interface status attributes
150. efault 0 0 0 0 ent is identified with its MAC address Range up to 255 255 255 255 If no IP address is specified then there is no connection to the client Therefore all other attributes in the table are ignored for this client mask This is the client its subnet mask Default 255 255 255 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 gateway This is the default gateway for the client its subnet Default 0 0 0 0 If no gateway is specified then the gateway of the Range up to 255 255 255 255 LAN channel is used nameServer This is the IP address of the name server that is avail Default 0 0 0 0 able to the client Range up to 255 255 255 255 tftpServer This is the IP address of the TFTP server that is avail Default 0 0 0 0 able to the client It is the next server to use in boot Range up to 255 255 255 255 trap MAC address This is the client its MAC address Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 If no MAC address is specified then there is no con Range up to EAA nection to the client Therefore all other attributes in the table are ignored for this client bootFile This is the location of the boot file Default lt empty gt Range max 128 characters hostName This is the name of the client Default lt empty gt Range max 20 characters domainName This is the name the client should use when resolving Default lt empty gt hostnames via the Domain Name System DNS Range max 20 characters netbiosNameServer This is the IP address of the NetBios server Default 0
151. el For more informa tion refer to the configuration attribute shdslRouter lanInterface bridgePortInfo on page 157 When bridging is enabled on a tunnel interface the tunnel acts exactly as a bridge port for a physical PPP connection Use this structure to configure the L2TP properties of the tunnel For more infor mation refer to shdsIRouter router tunnels I2tpTunnels I2tp on page 190 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 189 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdsIRouter router tunnels I2tpTunnels ip Default Range structure see below Use the ip structure in the I2tpTunnels table to configure the IP addresses of the tunnel The ip structure contains the following elements Benet Besson O O O ipAddress This is the IP address of the local side of the PPP con Default lt Opt gt nection inside the tunnel Range up to 255 255 255 255 ipNetMask This is the IP subnet mask of the PPP connection Default lt Opt gt inside the tunnel Range up to 255 255 255 255 ipGateway This is the IP address of the remote side of the PPP Default lt Opt gt connection inside the tunnel Range up to 255 255 255 255 Use this structure to configure the RIP behaviour in Pefault the tunnel Range structure see below The rip structure contains the following elements ETS pe OO metric This determines with how Default 1 much the metric parameter Range 1
152. er to RFC2597 regard ing class and drop precedence This means that depending on their Type Of Service TOS field some packets are moved to other queues and or dropped sooner than other packets in case the queue is full The highest 3 bits of the TOS field are mapped as follows 000 up to 100 queues 1 up to 5 respectively 101 and higher the low delay queue The next 2 bits define the drop precedence Bit values correspond with 00 and 01 maxLength1 10 maxLength2 11 maxLength3 For more information on drop precedence refer to the attribute shdsIRouter router traf ficPolicy J dropPrecedence tosMapped The data is redirected to the gueues based on the settings of the attribute shd sIRouter routerftrafficPolicy tos2QueueMapping 112 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration shdsiRouter router trafficPolicy dropPrecedence Default Range table see below Use this attribute to define for each user configurable gueue how many packets with a certain drop level may be gueued before they are dropped The dropPrecedence table contains the following elements Benet pe O maxLength1 This is the maximum length or drop level 1 Default 100 Range 1 3000 In case you set the attribute shdslRouter router trafficPol icy method to e trafficShaping or tosMapped then only this drop level is relevant tosDiffS
153. er will be completely configured and ready for use when you reach the end of this chapter The following gives an overview of this chapter e 5 1 Reading the configuration settings on page 48 e 5 2 Loading the default configuration on page 51 5 3 Configuring IP addresses on page 54 5 4 Configuring the line on page 55 5 5 Configuring the WAN encapsulation on page 56 5 6 Configuring static routes on page 69 5 7 Configuring the Routing Information Protocol on page 77 5 8 Configuring NAT and PAT on page 79 5 9 Configuring bridging on page 92 5 10 Configuring tunnelling on page 104 e 5 11 Configuring the priority and traffic policy on page 108 5 12 Activating the configuration on page 117 For a complete overview of the attributes of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router refer to the reference manual 48 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration 5 1 Reading the configuration settings As this chapter explains the basic configuration of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router it contains some DIP switch configuration tables and a lot of TMA attribute strings To enable you to read this information in a correct manner this section explains the structure of such tables and strings The following gives an overview of this section e 5 1 1 DIP switch configuration table on page 49 e 5 1 2 TMA attribute string on page 50 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 49 Use
154. erence manual Performance attributes shdsiRouter operatingSystem freeMemory This attribute displays the total free memory expressed in bytes shdsIRouter operatingSystem totalMemory This attribute displays the total RAM memory expressed in bytes shdslRouter operatingSystem taskInfo This attribute contains status information concerning the different tasks running on the processor It is a table grouping up to 31 task slots which is the maximum number of parallel tasks running on the proc essor s operating system This attribute contains the same elements as the status attribute shdsIRouter operatingSystem taskinfo on page 247 272 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Performance attributes Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 273 Reference manual Alarm attributes 11 Alarm attributes This chapter discusses the alarm attributes of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this chapter e 11 1 Alarm attributes overview on page 274 e 11 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 275 e 11 3 General alarms on page 278 e 11 4 LAN interface alarms on page 279 11 5 WAN interface alarms on page 280 e 11 6 Line alarms on page 281 e 11 7 Routing alarms on page 282 274 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual 11 1 Alarm attributes overview gt shdsIRouter totalAlarmLevel alarminfo notResponding alarmSyncLoss configChanged access u
155. ering is enabled keepAliveTimeOut This is the amount of time in seconds the tunnel Default 30 waits before it sends a keep alive message in case it Range 1 3600 receives no data If the tunnel does not receive incoming data during a certain time it sends a keep alive message to the other side and waits for an acknowledgement Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes 191 JETI EES a I2tpType This defines the L2TP function of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The I2tpType element has the following values The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router acts as an L2TP Access Concentrator The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router acts as an L2TP Net work Server If both local and remote Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router are set to auto they mutually determine who will be the LAC and who the LNS Select auto only if you use a Telindus router at both sides of the tunnel In conjunc tion with routers from other vendors e g Cisco specifically select an L2TP mode lac or Ins tunnelAuthentication This enables on or disables off tunnel authentica Default off tion Range on off L2TP incorporates a simple optional CHAP like tunnel authentication system dur ing control connection establishment If the LAC or LNS wishes to authenticate the identity of the peer it is contacting or being contacted by it sends a challenge packet If the expected respons
156. errors position 2 position 3 connected through 100 ohms resistor directly connected Sometimes you might want to connect the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router earth to the earth of the connected device although both earth potentials are not the same E g to avoid a big difference between both earth poten tials To avoid that high earth currents are generated you can make this connection through a 100 ohms resis tor Sometimes it is not possible to connect the connected device directly to the earth In that case you can earth the device through the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router by connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router to the earth and setting strap ST1 in position 3 Also the opposite situation might occur it is not possible to earth the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router In that case you can earth the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router through the connected device by connecting the device to the earth and setting strap ST1 in position 3 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 3 35 User manual DIP switches and straps of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 3 4 Changing DIP switch and strap settings To change the DIP switch and or strap settings of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router proceed as fol lows Disconnect the external power supply Unscrew the four screw located at the bottom of the housing Do not lift the cover too high in order not to damage the flex cable attached to the front Carefully tilt the cover towards th
157. erv then this drop level corresponds with the drop precendence bits value 00 and 01 maxLength2 This is the maximum length or drop level 2 Default 100 In case you set the attribute shdsiRouter routeritrafficPol Range 1 3000 icy method to e trafficShaping or tosMapped then this drop level is not relevant tosDiffServ then this drop level corresponds with the drop precendence bits value 10 maxLength3 This is the maximum length or drop level 3 Default 100 Range 1 3000 In case you set the attribute shdslRouter router trafficPol icy method to trafficShaping or tosMapped then this drop level is not relevant tosDiffServ then this drop level corresponds with the drop precendence bits value 11 Example Suppose e the shdslRouter router trafficPolicy method is set to tosDiffServ e for queue 1 you set maxLength1 100 maxLength2 200 and maxLength3 50 Now the following applies Queue 1 contains data An incoming data packet with is packets 4 drop level 1 drop level 2 drop level 3 less than 50 accepted accepted accepted more than 50 less than 100 accepted accepted dropped more than 100 less than 200 dropped accepted dropped more than 200 dropped dropped dropped 1 As defined in the TOS field Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 113 User manual Step by step configuration shdsIRouter
158. ese 122 6 4 Using PAT over PPP with a minimum of official IP addresses 123 6 5 Bridging and routing in a network rnnnnrnrennnnenenennenennennne 124 6 6 Tunnelling in a MetWOrK ei sitim vutti teens dla data katlamaja 125 T Troubleshooting Esa a tai te den a ng a kaskaadi deka maiad at la ae kraavi 127 TA You can not contact the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router over an IP connection 128 7 2 You can not contact the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router over a serial connection 129 7 3 How to troubleshoot the configuration wrrnannrs 130 7 4 How to check the status of the LAN interface nnenreas 131 7 5 How to check the status of the WAN interface mmrrras 133 7 6 How to check the Frame Relay status mmmterrnnnennnennnnnnnae 135 7 7 How to check the PPP status cia 2tei3 i200 cei cero eaaeynthta nde leeds waite Sane adeg 136 7 8 How to check the routing Status ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeceeesteeseeneeeenens 137 x Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Table of contents User and reference manual Reference manual nn onnonnnnnnaannnnnannannnannnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnane 141 8 Configuration attributes rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnaaae 143 8 1 Configuration attribute OVEMVIBW veccc b
159. etrieve the configuration in the CLI format from the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router There are two possible ways to create a configuration file in ASCII cli format e 13 6 4 Creating an ASCII file using the TFTP get command on page 298 e 13 6 5 Creating an ASCII file using the CLI get command on page 299 q Do not use the TMA export utility for creating an ASCII type configuration file not even when saving it as a TXT file The resulting format is not compatible with the CLI format 298 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 13 6 4 Creating an ASCII file using the TFTP get command To create a configuration file in ASCII cli format using the TFTP get command proceed as follows w KKK Start a TFTP session on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router For example by typing tftp 10 0 11 1 at the command prompt of your UNIX station where 10 0 11 1 is the LAN IP address of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Get the configuration file of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Example tftp gt get CONFIG CLI dest file cli Where get is the TFTP command to retrieve a file CONFIG CLI is the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router configuration file e dest _file cli is the destination file When the file transfer is finished close the TFTP session Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 299 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 13 6 5 Creatin
160. ets the private server address Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 If a packet is received with a source port number in the previously specified range it is sent to the private server address Example of a servicesAvailable table In this example a web server with address 192 168 47 250 on the local network is servicesAvailable accessible from the Internet using the PAT eS AAS address instead of using the server address gt 1 80 lt Opt gt 192 168 47 250 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 87 User manual Step by step configuration 5 8 6 Configuring NAT Despite the workarounds offered by the previous two PAT configuration attributes to overcome the lim itations of PAT there are situations where PAT is inadequate For example it is not possible to have several web servers on your local network It is also impossible to run an application with fixed source port numbers on several local devices that are connected simultaneously to a single Internet device This can only be solved by using several official IP addresses Network Address Translation Use the following attributes to configure NAT shdslRouter router natAddresses Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to define all the official IP addresses Entering an address in the table automatically enables NAT The natAddresses table contains the following elements KES pen OOO officialAddress This is th
161. etween the COM port of your PC and the auxiliary Is the cable between your port of the Telindus Router computer and the Make sure it is the correct cable check Telindus Router present the wiring and OK The Telindus Router is running in boot mode e Power off the router Reset DS1 1 to on Power the router Check DIP switch DS1 number 1 The firmware is corrupt Download a new firmware using TML 130 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Troubleshooting 7 3 How to troubleshoot the configuration In case of configuration problems you can take a look at the status and performance attributes of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router These attribute values are continuously calculated and stored in the memory of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Status and performance information can be used for the following e Incase of configuration errors status information may be useful to locate the error e If network problems arise information about the history of the communication link can be reviewed and analysed These statistics can be useful to locate and solve the problem By collecting performance information an operator can keep track of the global performance of the network e g network bottlenecks can be traced etc A complete description of all status and performance attributes can be found in the reference manual In the following sections you find the most important status attributes t
162. f the most relevant attributes of the router object is as follows SELECT router LIST defaultRoute gateway 195 7 12 254 interface wan routingTable a network 192 168 48 0 gateway 195 7 12 23 patAddress 195 7 12 22 As you can see the natGateways table is left empty since the Internet traffic uses the default route Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5185 User manual Step by step configuration PAT limitations As seen from the previous Port Address Translation has some limitations e Only outgoing sessions are supported This implies that you can not access servers on your local net work over the Internet Some TCP or UDP applications do not support port translation Limited ICMP support PAT limitation workaround The next attributes partly overcome the limitations of PAT shdsIRouter router portTranslations Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to define specific port number ranges that should not be translated Some TCP or UDP applications do not allow port translations these applications reguire a dedicated source port number In the portTranslations table you can define UDP and TCP port ranges that should not be translated Ifa packet with a source port number in such a range is received PAT replaces only the source IP address provided it is the first device using this port number When other devices using the same application hence the same p
163. figurations can be of help in case you have trouble connecting to or configuring the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual The following table gives an overview of the reference manual Chapter This chapter describes the configuration status performance and alarm attributes respectively displays and labels the different elements of the Telindus Maintenance Application sub system picture explains the auto install procedure It is in this chapter that BootP DHCP and TFTP is explained gives a firmware download procedure summarises the technical specifications of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Preface v User and reference manual Annexes The following table gives an overview of the annexes Annex A lists common TCP and UDP numbers Annex B shows ordering information Firmware version This manual describes the features containment tree and attributes of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router firmware version T2723 01500 vi Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Preface User and reference manual Typographical conventions The following typographical conventions are used in this manual normal text new or emphasised words application windows buttons and fields E g In the File name field enter Computer text you have to enter at the DOS or CLI prompt computer output and code examples E g NOK 1 1 Invalid command
164. fo on page 157 170 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes 8 5 3 HDLC configuration attributes kal shds lRouter wanInterface hdlc bridgePortinfo Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to set the bridging attributes of the HDLC WAN interface For more information refer to the configuration attribute shdsIRouter laninterface bridgePortlnfo on page 157 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual 8 6 Line configuration attributes Chapter 8 171 Configuration attributes ra shdsIRouter wanlnterface line channel Use this attribute to determine which unit is the central unit and which the remote unit Default central Range enumerated see below l e it determines which unit acts as master and which as slave during the synchronisation procedure Therefore set one Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router to central and its remote counterpart to remote ra shdsIRouter waninterface line speed Use this attribute to set the line speed The speed attribute has the following values auto In auto speed mode the central and remote Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router negoti ate the speed they are going to use on the line Default auto Range enumerated see below 64Kbps Besides auto speed you can also select a fixed line speed ranging from 64Kbps up 2304Kbps to 2304Kbps in steps of 64 kbps kal shdsIRouter waninterfacel
165. following elements Element This element displays for the corresponding object discriminator the total alarm count since the last cold boot currentAlarms the current alarms previousAlarms the second most recent alarms alarmMask the alarmMask as you configured it alarmLevel the alarmLevel as you configured it 278 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Alarm attributes 11 3 General alarms For general information on the alarm attributes refer to 11 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 275 ra shdsIRouter alarminfo The different alarms related to the shdslRouter object together with their explanation and default alarmMask and alarmLevel value are given in the following table The alarm is generated Default value alarmMask alarmLevel notResponding by the Alarm Manager TMA for HP OpenView when enabled the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router does not respond on its polling session alarmSyncLoss when the internal alarm buffer overflows enabled configChanged when the local configuration has been changed disabled access when a management session is active disabled This alarm is not activated when connecting via one of the ports of the Orchid 1003 LAN unknownState For future purposes disabled coldBoot each time the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router performs a disabled cold boot warmBoot each time the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router perfor
166. fully l q When the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router runs in boot mode because it is forced in this mode by DIP switch or because no firmware is present in the flash memory the PWR TST TXD and RXD LEDs light up continuously 2 6 3 The test LED TST This LED indicates whether a test is active or not continuously off No test is active continuously on A test is active Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 29 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 2 6 4 The transmit data LED TXD This LED reflects the status of the link and monitors the transmitted user data on the WAN line inter face continuously off Nothing is connected to the line mostly off A layer 2 handshake is in progress monitoring Layer 2 is up The LED goes out for a fixed time when a user data frame is sent on the line continuously on Layer 2 is up No user data is sent on the line 2 6 5 The receive data LED RXD This LED monitors the received user data on the WAN line interface continuously off No user data is received on the line monitoring The LED lights up fora fixed time when a user data frame is received on the line 30 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 2 6 6 The LAN transmit data LED LAN TXD This LED reflects the status of the link and monitors the transmitted user data on the LAN interface
167. g an ASCII file using the CLI get command To create a configuration file in ASCII cli format using the CLI get command and Telnet logging pro ceed as follows Step Action Start a Telnet session on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router You are automatically in CLI mode Redirect the CLI output or log it to a file Make sure you are in the top object shdslRouter and in the Edit Configuration group Execute the get r command Stop output redirection or logging In the redirected or logged file you now obtained remove all input and output logging before the get rcommand Also remove the get r command itself Now modify the configuration file KE po oo Change the string GET now located at the beginning of the file into SET Type the string Load Default Configuration at the beginning of the file Type the string Activate Configuration at the end of the file Save this file to a file with an extension cli 300 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 14 301 Reference manual Downloading firmware 14 Downloading firmware This chapter explains how to download new firmware into the flash memory of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this chapter e 14 1 Downloading firmware using TMA on page 302 e 14 2 Downloading firmware using TML on page 304
168. g the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router First this chapter gives some important safety instructions Then it explains how to install and connect the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router You are advised to read this chapter from the beginning to the end without skipping any part By doing so your Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router will be completely installed and ready for configuration when you reach the end of this chapter The following gives an overview of this chapter e 2 1 Safety instructions on page 18 2 2 Unpacking on page 19 e 2 3 Selecting a site on page 20 e 2 4 Installation and connection precautions on page 21 e 2 5 Connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router on page 22 2 6 The front panel LED indicators on page 26 18 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 2 11 Safety instructions IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Unplug the unit from the wall power outlet before installing adjusting or servicing The safety of this unit depends upon the third pin ground pin of the 3 wire grounding type plug Do not defeat this safety feature If the power outlet at your site only has 2 pins please consult a qualified elec trician Cy ACHTUNG WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSINSTRUKTIONEN Vor s mtlichen Arbeiten am Ger t Installation Einstellungen Reparaturen etc sollten Sie den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose ziehen Die Sicherheit dieses Ger tes ist abhangig von dem dr
169. g with the ping actions startPing and stopPing The pingResults attribute lists the results of the trans mitted ping The routingTable contains the following elements eom peen ipAddress This is the IP address being pinged nbrOfTxPackets This is the number of transmitted pings nbrOfRxPackets This is the number of correct received answers on the transmitted pings minReplyTime This is the lowest reply time of all correct received answers maxReplyTime This is the highest reply time of all correct received answers avrgReplyTime This is the average reply time of all correct received answers S shdslRouter router startPing Execute this actions to start transmitting pings to an IP address Several arguments can be set ipAddress This is the IP address you want to ping Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 iterations This is the number of pings Default 5 Range 0 If you enter 0 the IP address will be pinged an indefi nite number of times The only way to stop the ping session is by executing the stopPing action interval This is the interval in seconds between consecutive TDefault 1 pings Range 0 100 dataLength This is the length of the data transmitted in a ping Default 31 Range 0 1300 timeOut If a ping is sent the system will wait for a certain Default 00000d 00h 00m 05s period on the answer l e the system expects the Range 0000
170. ge shdsIRouter laninterface bridgeAccessList Use this attribute to control the access from certain hosts or networks Default lt empty gt Range table see below The bridge access list filters bridged frames based on the source MAC address The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router will not forward any packets to the interface that have a source MAC addresses which is specified in the bridge access list 158 ii Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdsIRouter laninterface arpTimeOut Default 00000d 02h 00m 00s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s Use this attribute to set the ageing time of the ARP Address Resolution 24855d 03h 14m 075 Protocol cache What is the ARP cache The LAN interface has been allocated a fixed Ethernet address also called MAC Medium Access Con trol address This MAC address is not user configurable The IP address of the LAN interface on the other hand is user configurable refer to the ipAddress attribute This means that the user associates an IP address with the predefined MAC address The MAC address IP address pairs are kept in a table called the ARP cache For an example of such a table refer to shdsIRouter laninterface arpCache on page 217 How does the ARP cache work Before the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router sends an IP packet on the LAN interface it has to know the MAC address of the destination device If the address is not
171. gured Inverse ARP is always enabled The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router supports multiple DLCls over its Frame Relay interface 8 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 1 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 1 3 2 PPP The Point to Point Protocol PPP is the standard protocol for LAN to LAN connections over a dedicated line PPP features link monitoring and CHAP authentication If link monitoring is enabled the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router sends a monitor reguest packet over the line at regular intervals The peer router should answer them to indicate the link is still OK If on several consecutive reguests no reply is received the PPP link is disconnected In that case the PPP hand shake starts again CHAP is an authentication protocol to secure the WAN link CHAP authentication is supported with clear passwords and with the MD5 hashing algorithm Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 1 9 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 1 3 3 HDLC High level Data Link Control HDLC encapsulation means that the Ethernet frames are put in an HDLC frame without any additional encapsulation such as Frame Relay or PPP This means that there is no protocol which monitors the status of the link but it also means that there is no encapsulation overhead Because the Ethernet frames are directly encapsulated only bridging is possible Important remark The HDLC encapsulation on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is compati
172. hat you can check in case the Tel indus 1420 SHDSL Router does not function as expected Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 131 User manual Troubleshooting 7 4 How to checkthe status of the LAN interface Ifthe data traffic does not pass the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router then check whether the LAN interface is up and running If you connected the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router to an Ethernet hub or directly to a network station you can easily check whether the Ethernet connection is OK The status attribute ifOperStatus If you are connected to the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router with a management tool simply look at the status of the ifOperStatus attribute shdslRouter laninterface fOperStatus This attribute displays the current operation status of the LAN interface Possible values are The LAN interface is up data transfer is possible The LAN interface is down data transfer is not possible The status of the LAN LEDs Check the status of the LAN LEDs to verify whether data can be sent to or received from the LAN What to do if the LAN interface is down In case the LAN interface is down you could check the following Action Check whether the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is operational If the front panel LEDs light up and if you can connect TMA it is working Check the cable that connects the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router with the Ethernet hub or the network station ls it connected ls it connect at bo
173. hdsiRouter laninterface ppp hisAuthenstate This attribute displays the authentication state of the router at the other side remote side of the link l e the state of the peer Possible values are No Authentication This is the start up state Wait On Challenge During the LCP handshake the authenticator already indicates it wants to authen ticate From that moment on the peer awaits a challenge packet Wait On Success Once the peer has sent a response it awaits a success or failure message Authen Successful The peer has received a success packet It remains in this state during data trans fer Authen Failure The peer has received a failure packet This is a transient state since the router starts the LCP handshake again after a failing authentication Authen Not Allowed This state only occurs when the peer does not accept the authentication request during the LCP handshake A possible reason might be that the peer router does not support CHAP k i shdsiRouter laninterface ppp bridgePortStatus This attribute displays the bridging status of the PPP WAN interface For more information refer to the status attribute shdsIRouter laninterface bridgePortStatus on page 218 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 231 Reference manual Status attributes 9 5 3 HDLC status attributes kal shds lRouter lanInterface hdlc bridgePortStatus This attribute displays the bridging status of the HDLC WAN interfac
174. he WAN interface The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router uses this received IP address as its WAN IP address Possibly it also uses this as its LAN IP address depending on the setting ofthe autolnstall Mode configuration attribute refer to shdslRouter wanInterface autolnstallMode on page 160 The IP address is assigned to both interfaces since the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router can operate with a numbered or unnumbered WAN interface However it does not store the IP address in non volatile memory Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 289 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 13 4 Getting the IP address over a Frame Relay WAN link The figure below shows the following set up e a Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router A is connected over a line to modem Y modem Y is connected to a Frame Relay network the Frame Relay network terminates in a central router Z this can be e g a Cisco router or another Telindus router suppose the central router Z belongs to an ISP suppose the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router A belongs to a customer IP address WAN interface 192 168 100 2 IP address WAN interface 192 168 100 1 Frame Relay network IP to DLCI number mapping IP address 192 168 100 1 gt DLCI 19 IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 The IP address is obtained as follows The ISP asks the Frame Relay service provider to set up a Permanent Virtual Cir
175. hen a packet Default unchanged Range 0 256 that matches an entry in the trafficShaping table its TOS field value is changed and the packet is redirected to a queue Selecting unchanged leaves the TOS field value as it is priority This is the destination queue for a packet matching an entry in the trafficShaping table Default Aueue1 Range enumerated see below The priority element has the following values Queue1 Queue2 Queue3 Aueue4 Aueue5 lowDelayQueue Start and end values Except for the ipProtocol newTosValue and priority elements it is possible to specify ranges using the start and end values There are two special cases e A start value is entered but no end value gt an exact match is needed for the start value Neither a start nor an end value is entered the field is not checked shdsiRouter router trafficPolicy tos2GueueMapping In case you have set the shdsIRouter router trafficPolicy method attribute to tosMapped then use the tos2QueueMapping table to specify which data has to be redirected to which queue The tos2QueueMapping table contains the following elements a 1 NIE E startTos endTos Traffic that has a Type Of Service field value within the specified range is redirected to the specified gueue Default lt empty gt Range table see below Default 0 start 255 end Range 0 255 targetAueue T
176. hen only the first entry in the ripv2SecretTable is used to transmit and receive RIP updates Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 81155 Reference manual Configuration attributes k shdsIRouter laninterface accessList Default lt empty gt R table bel Use this attribute to control the access from certain hosts or networks pool anid coastal The access list filters outgoing traffic for the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router based on the source IP address You can specify multiple entries within the access list When more than one entry applies to the same packet then only the most specific one is taken in consideration l e the entry covering the small est range If not one entry matches then the packet is dropped If the access list is empty then all pack ets are forwarded The accessList table contains the following elements ee T a sourceAddress This is the IP source address of the packet The Default 0 0 0 0 address may be a sub network address Range up to 255 255 255 255 mask This is the IP subnet mask for the sourceAddress By Default 255 255 255 255 combining an IP address with a mask you can Range up to 255 255 255 255 uniquely identify a range of addresses Before com paring IP addresses a logical AND function is made between both addresses and the mask action This defines which action has to be taken when a Default deny packet arrives with a source IP address that falls Range enu
177. her with the well known port number for L2TP i e 1701 make up the socket used for the L2TP session At the moment only one L2TP session can exist between one locallpAddress and remotelpAddress combination pppAuthentication This enables or disables CHAP authentication on the pefault disabled PPP connection in the tunnel Range enabled disabled For more information refer to the configuration attribute shdsIRouter wanlnterface ppp authentication on page 169 This specifies the type of the tunnel Default outgoingDial The type element has the following values Range enumerated see below outgoingDial The outgoing tunnel is not continuously open It is opened whenever data has to be sent through the tun nel and closed when no data is detected for a certain time outgoingLeasedLine The outgoing tunnel is opened as soon as the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is up and it stays open incoming The tunnel is an incoming tunnel dataChannelSe This enables on or disables off sequence number TDefault off quenceNumbering ing on the data messages These sequence numbers Range on off are used to detect lost packets and or restore the orig inal sequence of packets that may have been reordered during transport On control messages sequence numbering is always enabled It is recommended that for connections where reordering or packet loss may occur dataChannelSequenceNumb
178. his attribute displays the number of incoming packets that could not be delivered to a higher layer pro tocol because they contained errors This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra shdslRouter laninterface ifInUnknownProtos This attribute displays the number of incoming packets that were discarded because they contained an unknown or unsupported protocol This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra shdslRouter laninterface ifOutOctets This attribute displays the total number of octets bytes transmitted by the interface including framing characters This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra shdslRouter laninterface ifOutUcastPkts This attribute displays the total number of packets that higher level protocols requested to be transmitted to a unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 253 Reference manual Performance attributes shdslRouter laninterface ifOutNUcastPkts This attribute displays the number of non unicast packets that higher level protocols requested to be transmitted to a non unicast i e a broadcast or multicast address including those that were discarded or not sent This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter shdslRouter laninterface ifOutDiscards This attribute displays the number of outgoing packets that were discarded to prevent they are transmit ted by the interface This could be due to for instance the presence of
179. his attribute for broadcast forwarding Limited IP broadcasts address 255 255 255 255 and sub network broadcasts for a directly connected network are normally not forwarded by the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router However client server appli cations often use these broadcasts during start up to discover the server on the network Ifthe server is on a remote LAN then the detection may fail Therefore if you configure a helper IP address the received broadcasts address is replaced by this helper IP address and the packets are re routed using the destination address Multiple helper IP addresses can be configured The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router only substitutes addresses for the protocols which are selected in the helperProtocols attribute refer to the configuration attribute shdsIRouter router helperProtocols on page 178 shdsiRouter laninterface sendlcmpRedirect Default enabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to enable or disable the sending of ICMP messages If the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router receives an IP packet on the LAN interface for which e the next hop gateway is on the same interface e the next hop address is in the same subnet as the source then it sends an ICMP message to the originator of the packet to inform him that a better shorter route exists shdsIRouter laninterface lanWanStatusCoupling Default disabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to enable or
180. his isthe destination gueue for a packet matching an entry in the tos2QueueMapping table Default Aueue1 Range enumerated see below The targetAueue element has the following values Queue1 Queue2 Queue3 Aueue4 Queue5 lowDelayQueue 197 198 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes 8 11 Bridging configuration attributes kal shdsIRouter bridge spanningTree Defa lt Range structure see below Use this attribute to set the bridging configuration attributes Whereas the bridgePortlnfo attribute groups the bridging attributes that are applicable on an individual interface the spanningTree attribute groups the bridging attributes that are applicable on the bridge as a whole The spanningTree structure contains the following elements spanningTree This sets the spanning tree protocol Default none Protocol The spanningTreeProtocol element has the following val Range enumerated see below ues The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router uses the self learning principle This means that the bridge itself learns which data it has to forward and which data it has to block l e it builds its own bridging table IEEE p802 1D The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router uses the self learning principle in conjunction with the Spanning Tree protocol Because Spanning Tree bridging is somewhat more complicated than self learning bridging an introduction is
181. ht click on the router object A pop up menu appears In this menu select Add Child and select the object you want to add A pop up window appears In this window type the instance value for the object and click on OK Use the CREATE INSTANCE command Type the instance value for the object Use the following command set select objectName instanceValue where instanceValue is a string of your choice Example set select priorityPolicy PP1 Use the CREATE INSTANCE command Type the instance value for the object The new object appears The instance values you defined for the priorityPolicy and trafficPolicy objects also have to be entered in the priorityPolicy and trafficPolicy attributes located in the wanInterface object The following example will clarify this Example Suppose you create a priorityPolicy object with the instance value PP1 and a trafficPolicy object with the instance value TP1 The containment tree would look as depicted at the right 8 E tunnels MJ priorityPolicy PP1 MJ trafficPolicy TP1 Now enter these instance values of these objects in the wanlnterface object This would look as follows crocusRouter wanlntertace Ef Configuration Status Value gt priorityPolicy PP1 p trafficPolicy TP1 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router User manual Step by step configuration 5 11 6 Configuring the priority policy kal shds lRouter router priorityP
182. idging functionality of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router you have to activate it Do this on both the LAN and WAN interface Enabling bridging on the LAN interface shdsiRouter laninterface bridgePortlnfo bridging Default disabled Range enabled disabled Use the bridging element of the bridgePortlnfo structure to enable or disable bridging on the LAN interface shdsiRouter laninterface routing Default enabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to determine whether IP packets are treated by the bridg ing process or not The routing attribute has the following values enabled IP packets are passed directly to the routing process IP packets not destined for the router its MAC address are discarded disabled The IP packets are first passed to the bridging process If necessary IP packets destined for the router itself are passed on to the routing process If the routing attribute is set to disabled it is possible to have an IP subnet that spans multiple interfaces or the LAN interface and some DLCls Enabling bridging on the WAN interface On the WAN interface bridging and routing have to be configured for each encapsulation protocol sepa rately Encapsulation Attribute location Frame Relay In case of Frame Relay encapsulation bridging and routing have to be set for each DLCI shdsIRouter waninterface frameRelay dlciTable bridgePortlnfo bridging shdsIRouter waninterface fr
183. ign test or private IP addresses to your local network In that case you have to configure your Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router to translate IP addresses using NAT or PAT Even when there are sufficient official IP addresses available you may still choose to use NAT e g for preserving previously assigned test addresses to all the devices on your local network Private IP address range The international authority IANA assigns the official also called global IP addresses It has also defined 3 ranges of IP addresses for private use This means that you can use these addresses without regis tration on your internal network as long as you are not connected to the Internet 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 1 class A network 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 16 class B networks 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 256 class C networks You can define sub networks in these ranges for your private IP addresses Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 79 User manual Step by step configuration 5 8 2 When use NAT and or PAT Check in the next table whether you need NAT and or PAT No of official IP No of devices on local Use NAT of PAT Refer to addresses network more than 1 Use PAT 5 8 4 Configuring PAT on page 85 k gt 1 more than k Use NAT in combination 5 8 7 Combining PAT with PAT and NAT on page 91 at least k k 2 1 1 No translation 1 Skip this section needed 2 5 8 6 Configuring Ifyou wanttranslatio
184. imary goal is to provide path redundancy while pre venting undesirable loops in the network Network loops are caused by multiple active paths between stations If a loop exists in a network sta tions might receive duplicate messages In addition bridges might learn MAC addresses on multiple ports These conditions result in an unstable network The Spanning Tree algorithm As said before for a layer 2 Ethernet network to function properly only one active path must exist between two stations The Spanning Tree algorithm calculates the best loop free path throughout a bridged network This single loop free path can only be established because the bridges in the network know of each oth ers existence They communicate with each other by sending and receiving Spanning Tree frames at regular intervals The bridges do not forward these frames but use them to construct a loop free path 94 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration 5 9 4 What is the Spanning Tree root bridge The root bridge Spanning Tree defines a tree with a root bridge and a loop free path from the root to all bridges in the extended network The root bridge is the logical centre of the Spanning Tree topology Redundant data paths are forced into a stand by blocked state If a network segment in the spanning tree fails and a redundant path exists the spanning tree algorithm recalculates the spanning tree topol ogy and activate
185. ion Hea a a a l error Threshold This defines the maximum number of unanswered Default 3 Status Enquiry messages that the Telindus 1420 Range 1 10 SHDSL Router will accept before declaring the inter face down See also the attribute monitoredEvents monitoredEvents This defines the number of status polling intervals Default 4 over which the error threshold is counted Range 1 10 In other words ifthe station receives an errorThreshold number of unanswered Sta tus Enguiry messages within a monitoredEvents number of pollinginterval intervals then the interface is declared down Example If the station receives 3 unanswered Status Enquiry messages within 4 x 10s 40s then the interface is declared down expectedPolllnterval This defines the maximum time between two consec pefault 00000d 00h 00m 15s utive incoming Status Enquiry messages Select the Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s value 0 in order to disable verification 00000d 00h 00m 30s This attribute is only relevant when using Frame Relay over a point to point link no Frame Relay network In Frame Relay language a router is normally considered as a DTE However if two routers are connected to each other in Frame Relay but without a real Frame Relay network in between then the routers also take the role of a DCE This hap pens automatically without the need of a reconfiguration The Status Enquiry mes sages are se
186. ion of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router in CLI format is as follows IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 ACTION Load Default Configuration SET SELECT lanInterface LIST ipAddress 192 168 47 254 SELECT wanInterface LIST ipAddress 195 7 12 22 encapsulation ppp SELECT router LIST defaultRoute gateway 195 7 12 254 interface wan patAddress 195 7 12 22 natAddresses a officialAddress 195 7 12 21 privateAddress 192 168 47 250 ACTION Activate Configuration Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 123 User manual Configuration examples 6 4 Using PAT over PPP with a minimum of official IP addresses This is another example of a local network that only uses private addresses A PPP link connects your site to the Internet Service Provider At your site a Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is installed You only received 1 official IP address from the ISP To reduce the number of official IP addresses the ISP also uses private IP addresses on the PPP link The central router its routing table has a host route to its PAT address per customer IP address WAN interface 192 168 100 1 IP address WAN interface PAT address 195 7 12 22 192 168 100 254 Frame Relay or IP address LAN interface 192 168 47 254 PDH SDH network your site MD D 7 ISP serial intf IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 The configuration of the Telindus
187. is connected to Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 ipNetMask Use this attribute to assign an IP subnet mask to the interface The subnet mask defines the number of IP devices that may be present on the corresponding IP segment Default 255 255 255 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 153 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdsiRouter laninterface routing Default enabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to determine whether IP packets are treated by the bridg ing process or not The routing attribute has the following values enabled IP packets are passed directly to the routing process IP packets not destined for the router its MAC address are discarded disabled The IP packets are first passed to the bridging process If necessary IP packets destined for the router itself are passed on to the routing process If the routing attribute is set to disabled it is possible to have an IP subnet that spans multiple interfaces or the LAN interface and some DLCls shdslRouter laninterface metric Default 1 Range 1 15 Use this attribute to determine with how much the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router increments the metric parameter of a route Routing information includes a metric parameter Every time a router is passed this parameter is incre mented Also the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router increments
188. ish an IP connection between your computer running the management tool e g TMA Telnet and the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router then follow the procedure below Close and then restart the management tool Try to connect to the Telindus Router again Check connectivity to the Telindus Router with a ping from the same station Re install the management tool e g TMA Telnet and reboot the station Check connectivity to the router next to the Telindus Router in the path to the station There is an IP network problem Fix it Is the nearest router reachable through the LAN or through the WAN interface Check the TP Ethernet cable and indication on the hub Is the modem link up There is a modem link problem Fix it Establish a serial connection to the Telindus Router Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 129 User manual Troubleshooting 7 2 You can not contact the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router over a serial connection If you can not establish a serial connection between your computer running the management tool e g TMA Telnet and the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router then follow the procedure below If you initially could not reach the Telindus Router over IP it means there is a Can you contact the configuration error on the router Fix it Telindus Router and try to connect over IP again Connect or reconnect the cable b
189. itten Kontakt dem Erdungspin des 3 poligen Steckers Beachten Sie unbedingt diese Sicherheitsstandard Sollten Sie nur eine altere 2 polige Steck dose zur Verf gung haben lassen Sie diese von einem Elektriker gegen eine 3 polige Steckdose auswechseln A SAFETY WARNING To avoid damage to the unit please observe all procedures described in this chapter A SICHERHEITSBESTIMMUNGEN Um eine Besch digung des Ger tes zu verhindern beachten Sie bitte unbedingt die Sicherheitsbestim mungen die in diesem Abschnitt beschrieben werden Ensure that the unit and its connected equipment all use the same AC power and ground to reduce noise interference and possible safety hazards caused by differences in ground or earth potentials Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 19 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 2 2 Unpacking Checking the shipping carton Rough handling during shipping causes most early failures Before installation check the shipping car ton for signs of damage e If the carton box is damaged please place a claim with the carrier company immediately e Ifthe carton box is undamaged do not dispose of it in case you need to store the unit or ship it in the future Package contents The box should contain the following items e Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router e TMA CD ROM including this User and Reference manual in PDF format Optionally depending which sales item you ordered ex
190. ivate IP addresses on the LAN you can also do the opposite private IP addresses on the WAN and official IP addresses on the LAN Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 1111 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 1 5 Bridging The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router can be configured to act as a bridge This enables you to split up your LAN network into smaller parts or segments This decreases the amount of data traffic on the separated LAN segments and conseguently increases the amount of available bandwidth Self learning and TST principle You can configure the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router so thatit either uses the e self learning principle e self learning principle in conjunction with the Transparent Spanning Tree algorithm self learning The bridge itself learns which data it has to forward to the other LAN segment and which data it has to block 1 e it builds its own bridging table In other words you yourself do not have to configure a bridging table with MAC addresses of stations that are located on the separated LAN segments but that have to be able to communicate with each other self learning TST This is based on the self learning principle but a protocol is used to implement the TST algorithm Bridging loops The primary goal of this algorithm is to avoid that bridging loops arise A bridg ing loop occurs when two self learning bridges are placed in parallel This results in data that keeps circling ar
191. ively ignore drop alarms in TMA for HP Open View if these alarms are below a certain level The filter number that you define using the alarmFilter attribute has to correspond with a filter that you have to define in the Alarm Manager of TMA for HP OpenView In the Alarm Manager it is possible to specify a minimum alarm level that is needed before alarms are logged in HP OpenView This can be specified for each filter number shdslRouter management loopback ipAddress Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 Use this attribute to assign an IP address to the loop back interface The loop back interface is a software interface which can be used for management purposes This inter face is always up regardless of the state of the physical interfaces This means the router will always respond to ICMP echo requests sent to this address In every other respect the loop back address behaves the same as an IP address of a physical interface If the loop back address is used and RIPv2 is active then a host route to the loop back address is included in the RIP updates 208 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 209 Reference manual Status attributes 9 Status attributes This chapter discusses the status attributes of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this chapter e 9 1 Status attribute overview on page 210
192. k a 4 a ja nd Router R modem Frame Relay modem modem gt Internet e TJ gt 5 j ISP 6 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 1 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 1 3 WAN protocols The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router supports several encapsulation protocols on its WAN interface These are introduced in this section The following gives an overview of this section 1 3 1 Frame Relay on page 7 e 1 3 2 PPP on page 8 e 1 3 3 HDLC on page 9 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 1 7 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 1 3 1 Frame Relay Frame Relay is suited for high speed lines with a low error rate as on baseband lines with Crocus modems IP traffic is encapsulated in Frame Relay using the techniques described in RFC1490 FRAD Since Frame Relay networks use typically dedicated lines only Permanent Virtual Circuits PVCs on dedicated lines are supported The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router supports the Frame Relay Local Management Interface LMI Com pliance with LMI revision 1 ANSI T1 617 D and CCITT can be selected Several LMI parameters are configurable Dynamic mapping between IP addresses and DLCls is based on the Inverse ARP protocol It allows the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router to discover the IP address of a remote gateway associated with a virtual circuit Inverse ARP creates dynamic address mappings in contrast with mappings that are statically con fi
193. k gateway interface preference metric gt 1 192 168 48 0 255 255 2550 192 168 468 254 wan 10 2 Router B routingT able network mask gateway interface _ preference metric b 1 192 168 47 0 255 255 2550 192 168 47 254 wan 10 2 73 74 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration Deducing the interface element value If you do not specify a value for the interface element then this value is deduced from the setting of the gateway element Depending on the presence of an IP address on the WAN interface the deduction is done as follows not present In this case the interface element value is deduced as follows If the gateway address then the interface ele mentis setto belongs to the Ethernet interface subnet does not belong to the Ethernet interface subnet present In this case the interface element value is deduced as follows If the gateway address then ae belongs to the Ethernet interface subnet the interface element is set to lan belongs to the serial interface subnet the interface element is set to wan neither belongs to the Ethernet interface subnet the route is discarded nor to the serial interface subnet i e not used Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 75 User manual Step by step configuration 5 7 Configuring the Routing Information Protocol What is RIP RIP or Routing Information Protocol is a prot
194. l protocol startPort endPort action network to the outside world you have to list b1 udp 1728 lt Opt gt A TMA port number 1728 in this table How gt 2 udp 2000 2000 deny ever keep in mind that even then it is still not possible to have two simultaneous TMA sessions to the same outside world address If you do not want that UDP packets with port numbers in the range 2000 up to 3000 are sent to the out side world then you also have to include those in the table shdslRouter router servicesAvailable Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to define specific port number ranges for incoming Internet traffic that should not be translated Instead it is sent to the corresponding private IP address The servicesAvailable table makes it possible to have a server on the local network that can be accessed from the Internet although it has no official IP address The servicesAvailable table contains the following elements ea 72 ISSN protocol This selects the protocol tcp or udp Default tcp Range tcp udp startPort This defines the lowest value of the TCP or UDP port Defauito range Range 0 65535 endPort This defines the highest value of the TCP or UDP port Default lt Opt gt range Range 0 65535 If no endPort value is defined lt Opt gt then the port range is limited to the startPort value only serverAddress This s
195. lRouter lanInterface rip2Authentication Default disabled Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to enable or disable RIP authentication on this interface Routers exchange information between each other for management purposes They do this using the Router Information Protocol RIP For security reasons you can enable an authentication The rip2Authentication attribute has the following values disabled No authentication is used text The authentication secret is exchanged in clear text md5 Instead of sending the authentication secret together with the RIP updates itis hashed together with the routing information into a unigue value This authentica tion is the most secure This because it provides also protection against tampering with the contents of a packet both an incorrect password and modified routing information results in different hash values D Remarks e If authentication is enabled either text or md5 then only updates using that authentication are proc essed All other updates on that interface are discarded e Ifyou use md5 and if for a certain interface multiple secrets are present in the ripv2SecretTable then the first entry in the ripv2SecretTable is used to transmit RIP updates Authentication of the received RIP updates is done by looking for the first secret with a matching key e Ifyou use text and if for a certain interface multiple secrets are present in the ripv2SecretTable t
196. line in this file contains no more than 500 characters 296 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 13 6 2 Creating a binary configuration file To create a configuration file in binary cms format proceed as follows Start a TMA session on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Make changes to its configuration if necessary in order to obtain the desired configura tion You do not have to send these configuration changes to the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Click on the Export data to file button cy In the Export configuration parameters window select the following Choose a directory where to save the file e Enter a name for the file e Make sure the file type is CMS e Make sure the Full configuration option is selected Click on the Save button The edited configuration of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is stored on the PC in binary format The file contains the complete configuration including the Activate Config uration command As a result the configuration is immediately activated when down loaded with TFTP Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 297 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 13 6 3 Creating an ASCII configuration file To create a configuration file in ASCII format you can use the CLI syntax as explained in the Mainte nance Tools manual However for the first time user it is easier to r
197. line retrain Use this attribute to determine at what bit error rate BER a retrain cycle will be initiated in case the line quality deteriorates The retrain structure contains the following elements Default Range structure see below a 2 SNES errorPersistence Period in seconds over which the average BER is Time calculated If within this period the average BER eguals or exceeds the value entered in the errorThresh old attribute the modem will retrain Default 30 Range 1 255 errorThreshold Bit error rate BER in percent which defines when the modem should retrain Default 100 Range 10 100 kal shdsIRouter waninterface line lt configurationAlarmAttributes gt For more information on the configuration alarm attributes alarmMask and alarmLevel and on the alarms in general refer to 11 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 275 For more information on the alarms of the line object refer to 11 6 Line alarms on page 281 172 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes 8 7 Routing configuration attributes ra shdslRouter router defaultRoute Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to set the default route also called gateway address Besides specifying routing entries for specific networks you can also specify a gateway address Pack ets for destinations that do not match o
198. llowing values Queue1 Queue2 Queue3 Aueue4 Queue5 lowDelayQueue Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 51115 User manual Step by step configuration 5 12 Activating the configuration Once the basic configuration of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is made it has to be activated Do this by clicking on the the Send all attributes to device button in TMA e A 116 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 119 User manual Configuration examples 6 Configuration examples This chapter shows some configuration examples for the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this chapter 6 1 LAN extension over a PDH SDH network on page 120 6 2 LAN extension over a Frame Relay network on page 121 6 3 Connecting a LAN to the Internet using NAT and PAT on page 122 6 4 Using PAT over PPP with a minimum of official IP addresses on page 123 6 5 Bridging and routing in a network on page 124 6 6 Tunnelling in a network on page 125 120 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuration examples 6 1 LAN extension over a PDH SDH network In this example a remote office is connected to a central office over a PDH or SDH network A modem link connects the remote office to the PDH or SDH network At the local office a Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is installed The central router is a third party router The WAN encapsul
199. lnErrors iflinUnknownProtos ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts ifOutNUcastPkts ifOutDiscards ifOutErrors ifOutQLen For more information on these performance attributes refer to 10 2 LAN interface performance attributes on page 252 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 267 Reference manual Performance attributes 10 8 Bridging performance attributes shdsiRouter bridge bridgeCache When a port of the bridge enters the learning state it stores the MAC addresses of the stations situated on the LAN that is connected to this port The MAC addresses are stored in a MAC address database or bridge cache The bridgeCache attribute visualises this address database The bridgeCache table contains the following elements A OO OA interface This is the interface through which the station with the MAC address as displayed in the macAddress element can be reached macAddress This is the MAC address of a station on the bridged LAN rxCount This is the number of frames received from the corresponding MAC address txCount This is the number of frames forwarded to the corresponding MAC address shdsIRouter bridge bridgeDiscards This attribute displays the number of times a frame was discarded because e it was received on the same interface as the one through which the destination address can be reached e it was received on an interface that is not in the forwarding state shdsIRouter bridge bridgeFloods
200. mance attributes shdslRouter router natTcpSocketsUsed This attribute displays the number of sockets currently in use by PAT and NAT for TCP applications shdslRouter router natUdpSocketsUsed This attribute displays the number of sockets currently in use by PAT and NAT for UDP applications shdsIRouter router natlempSocketsUsed This attribute displays the number of sockets currently in use by PAT and NAT for ICMP applications shdsIRouter router natTcpAllocs This attribute indicates how many TCP sockets have been allocated since cold boot Together with the performance attributes natUdpAllocs and natlempAllocs it gives an indication of the type of traffic that is being routed shdslRouter router natUdpAllocs This attribute indicates how many UDP sockets have been allocated since cold boot Together with the performance attributes natTcpAllocs and natlcmpAllocs it gives an indication of the type of traffic that is being routed shdsIRouter router natlempAllocs This attribute indicates how many ICMP sockets have been allocated since cold boot Together with the performance attributes natTcpAllocs and natUdpAllocs it gives an indication of the type of traffic that is being routed 264 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Performance attributes shdsIRouter router pingResults It is possible to send a ping to a distant IP address only one ping at a time You can start and stop pingin
201. me bridgePriority value then the bridge with the lowest MAC address becomes the root bridge Setting the port priority and path cost on the LAN interface shdsIRouter laninterface bridgePortlnfo priority Default 128 Range 0 255 Each port of a bridge has a unique port identifier The priority element of the bridgePortlnfo structure is a part of this port identifier and allows you to change the priority of the port It is taken as the more significant part in priority comparisons The other part of the unique port identifier has a fixed relationship to the physical or logical port This assures the uniqueness of the unique port identifier among the ports of a single bridge shdsIRouter laninterface bridgePortlnfo pathCost Default 100 Range 1 65535 The pathCost element of the bridgePortInfo structure is the value that is added to the total cost of the path to the root bridge provided that this particular port is a root port i e that the path to the root goes through this port Setting the port priority and path cost on the WAN interface On the WAN interface priority and pathCost have to be configured for each encapsulation protocol sepa rately Frame Relay In case of Frame Relay encapsulation priority and pathCost have to be set for each DLCI shdsIRouter waninterface frameRelay dlciTable bridgePortlnfo priority shdsIRouter waninterface frameRelay dlciTable bridgePortlnfo pathCost shdsIRou
202. merated see below within the specified address range The possible actions are The packet is dropped The packet is forwarded l q If you specify one entry or multiple entries for which the action is set to deny then also specify at least one entry for which the action is set to allow Else all packets are dropped Example 1 accessList an This example shows an access list that only for wards traffic from subnet 192 168 48 0 to the LAN __ soureediddress mask taotioni gt 1 192 168 48 0 255 255 255 0 allow b 2 192 168 4810 255 255 255 255 deny interface except for packets from station 192 168 48 10 All other traffic for the LAN interface is dropped Example 2 accesslist The next example shows an access list to forward all traffic except the traffic from subnet 192 168 48 0 sourceddress mask action b 1 192 168 48 0 255 255 255 0 deny b2 0000 0 0 0 0 allow The second entry is the rule to add if you want all pack ets that do not match the previous entries to be for warded 156 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes kal shdsIRouter laninterface extendedAccessList Default lt empty gt Range table see bel Use this attribute to control the access from certain hosts or networks en eae Similar to a simple access list an extended access list filters outgoing traffic for the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Howeve
203. mmon TCP and UDP numbers Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Annex B 319 Annex product information Annex B product information The following table displays the product information of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Product name Description 172729 TELINDUS 1420 SHDSL ROUTER 230VAC IP router with 1pair SHDSL line interface For LAN LAN connections Management over IP via TMA TMA CLI telnet SNMP amp TFTP Includes European 230VAC power adapter 172730 TELINDUS 1420 SHDSL ROUTER NPWR IP router with 1pair SHDSL line interface For LAN LAN connections Management over IP via TMA TMA CLI telnet SNMP amp TFTP Delivered without power adapter 172899 MANUAL TELINDUS 1420 SHDSL ROUTER Manuals are delivered with the product in electronic E format CD ROM for environmental reasons If however a hardcopy print out of the manual is required this sales item can be used Between brackets an indication of the language 175590 PWR PLUG EUR VERSION 230VAC Wallplug power module European type 230Vac gt 9Vdc gt 9VDC for Desktop units delivered without power adapter 175592 PWR PLUG UK VERSION 230VAC gt 9VDC Wallplug power module UK type 230Vac gt 9Vdc for Desktop units delivered without power adapter 171304 PWR PLUG 48VDC gt 7 5 9VDC Wallplug power module 48Vdc gt 7 5 9Vdc for Desktop units delivered without power adapter 320 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Annex B Annex product information
204. ms a disabled warm boot codeConsistency For future purposes disabled Fail configConsistency For future purposes disabled Fail Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 279 Reference manual Alarm attributes 11 4 LAN interface alarms For general information on the alarm attributes refer to 11 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 275 shdslRouter laninterface alarminfo The alarms related to the laninterface object together with their explanation and default alarmMask and alarmLevel value is given in the following table The alarm is generated Default value alarmMask alarmLevel linkDown when no valid LAN data is detected l e when the con enabled 3 nection between the interface and the LAN is down 280 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual 11 5 WAN interface alarms Chapter 11 Alarm attributes For general information on the alarm attributes refer to 11 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 275 Ta shdsIRouter wanlnterface alarminfo The alarms related to the wanlnterface object together with their explanation and default alarmMask and alarmLevel value is given in the following table The alarm is generated linkDown when an error situation is detected in the encapsulation protocol Frame Relay PPP X 25 or HDLC For instance an error condition in the Frame Relay LMI a failed authentication in PPP Defa
205. n This attribute displays the current line attenuation in dB e g 11 0 shdsiRouter wanlnterface line linePair 1 noiseMargin This attribute displays the current noise margin of the line in dB e g 2 5 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 233 Reference manual Status attributes 9 7 Routing status attributes shdsIRouter router routingTable This attribute lists all known routes with their operating status This information is retrieved from the con figured IP addresses the static routes and the interface status The routingTable contains the following elements a network This is the IP address of the destination network mask This is the network mask of the destination network gateway This is the IP address of the next router on the path to the destination network interface This is the interface through which the destination network can be reached Pos sible values are internal The own protocol stack is used lan The destination network can be reached through the Ethernet interface The destination network can be reached through the serial interface discard Packets for this destination are discarded encapsulation This indicates the used encapsulation It is related to the interface for this route Possible values are none The IP packets are not encapsulated ethernet The IP packets are encapsulated with the ARPA MAC header frameRelay The IP packets are encapsul
206. n NAT on page 89 use NAT 80 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration 5 8 3 How does PAT work Example of a network topology for Internet connection Consider the following network topology A Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is installed at your site The Internet Service Provider has an IP router with a high speed Frame Relay interface or one or more G 704 framed E1 interfaces running PPP You received only one single official IP address from you ISP being 195 7 12 22 IP address WAN interface IP address WAN interface 195 7 12 22 195 7 12 254 IP address LAN interface Frame Relay or 192 168 47 254 N PDH SDH network your site Internet va modem IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 What does PAT do The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router replaces the source address by its PAT address in all the traffic com ing from the Ethernet and destined for the Internet Depending on the IP transport protocol and the number of simultaneous users accessing the Internet the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router takes different actions First let us take a look at the different IP transport protocols Transport Description protocol TCP This is a connection oriented protocol two devices communicating with the TCP protocol build a session before exchanging user data When they have finished exchanging user data the session is closed Examples of s
207. n a WAN The dlciTable contains the following elements TES pee o This is the DLCI number to reach a remote network Default 16 Range 16 1022 The DLCI number may have any value between 16 and 1022 However if you set the configuration attribute Imi to q933 Annex A you should only use DLCIs up to 1007 This is the Committed Information Rate for the corre pefault 0 sponding DLCI Range 0 2048000 The CIR is expressed in bps Any value between 0 and 2048000 bps can be con figured If the cir value is set to 0 default it means the complete bandwidth may be used no flow control This is the Excess Information Rate for the corre Default 0 sponding DLCI Range 0 2048000 The EIR is expressed in bps Any value between 0 and 2048000 bps can be con figured If the eir value is set to 0 default it means no excess burst is allowed If you configure EIR then CIR must also be configured Else there is no flow con routing Use this attribute to determine whether IP packets are Default enabled treated by the bridging process or not Range enabled disabled For more information refer to the configuration attribute shdsIRouter laninterface rout ing on page 153 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 81165 Reference manual Configuration attributes ena a SENSE gateway This is the corresponding IP address of the remote Default 0 0 0 0 router Rang
208. n on the Load Default Configuration action so that it is selected Press the right mouse button and select Execute Alternatively double click on the Load Default Configuration action To see the default configuration click on the Retrieve all attributes from device button E In the action window of TMA click the left mouse button on the Activate Configuration action so that it is selected Press the right mouse button and select Execute Alternatively double click on the Activate Configuration action 54 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration 5 3 Configuring IP addresses The first thing you have to configure is the Telin dus 1420 SHDSL Router its IP address You can assign an IP address to the LAN and WAN inter Select the object in order to assign an face IP address to the laninterface Ethernet interface waninterface serial interface You can also use the BootP procedure in order to obtain an IP address An IP address obtained using such a dynamic procedure is not displayed in the configuration window but can be found in the status window Use the following two attributes to configure the IP address yourself ra shdslRouter lt interface gt ipAddress Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 Use this attribute to assign an IP address to the interface The address should belong to the subnet the interface is connected t
209. nView e it will not be shifted towards the previousAlarms element of the alarminfo attribute refer to the alarm attribute shdsIRouter alarminfo on page 277 shdslRouter alarmLevel Use this attribute to assign a priority level to each alarm of the corresponding object The alarm level range goes from 0 to 254 where 0 is the lowest and 254 is the highest priority level The alarmLevel of an unmasked active alarm is sent to the totalAlarmLevel alarm attribute of the top object shdslRouter Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 111277 Reference manual Alarm attributes 11 2 2 General alarm attributes shdsIRouter totalAlarmLevel This attribute is only present in the top object of the containment tree of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router being shdslRouter It displays the priority level of an unmasked active alarm When several alarms are generated at the same time the highest priority level is shown If the alarm levels are set in a structured manner one look at the totalAlarmLevel attribute enables the operator to make a quick estimation of the problem The value of the totalAlarmLevel attribute is also communicated to the central management system e g HP OpenView where it determines the colour of the icon This colour is an indication of the severity of the alarm shdslRouter alarmInfo This attribute contains the actual alarm information of the corresponding object The alarminfo structure contains the
210. nation are discarded preference This displays the route preference If more than one route matches the IP destination address this attribute deter mines which route is used The route with the lowest preference value will be used This is the type of the route Possible values are This is a host route i e a route to a single IP address instead of a complete network This is also used for the router its own IP address internal A route with this status is irrelevant local This route is for directly connected networks rip This route has been received by a RIP update static This route has been configured i e it is a static route metric If two routes exist with the same preference then the route with the lowest metric value is chosen The metric attribute serves as a cost for using the route In most cases it indicates the number of hops routers required to reach a destination timeOut In case of a RIP route the timeOut attribute displays the time the route will remain in the routing table if no RIP updates are received anymore For other routes this attribute always displays 00000d 00h 00m 00s Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 139 User manual Troubleshooting The following figure displays the routing table for the example in 6 1 LAN extension over a PDH SDH network on page 120 F ual pT bk 0 nemo b1 Wie u HN 12414 7 awad nre ISA 75h nlenel IA NI H re Hs Be 0
211. ne of the routing table entries are sent to this gateway address The defaultRoute structure contains the following elements gateway This is the IP address of the next router that will route Default 0 0 0 0 all packets for which no specific static or dynamic Range up to 255 255 255 255 route is exists in the routing table Whether you can omit the gateway element or not is linked to the following condi tions If the interface element is set you can not omit the gateway element you can omit the gateway element only when using PPP encapsulation interface This specifies the interface through which the gate Default lt opt gt way can be reached Range enumerated see below The interface element has the following values The interface element value is deduced from the setting of the gateway element refer to Deducing the interface ele ment value on page 173 Select the lt opt gt value for routes that use a tunnel The gateway can be reached through the Ethernet inter face The gateway can be reached through the serial inter face discard Packets for this destination are discarded preference This defines the level of importance of the default Default 10 route with respect to routes learnt via RIP Range 1 200 RIP routes always have a preference of 60 Routes with a lower preference value are chosen over routes with higher preference value
212. ne rou Range enumerated see below te to a sub network is defined in the routing table and these routes have e identical destination addresses masks preferences and metrics different gateway then you can use the alternativeRoutes attribute to determine which route the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router uses to reach the sub network The alternativeRoutes attribute has the following values backup The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router always uses the same route to reach the sub network Only when this route goes down it uses the alternative route roundRobin The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router alternately uses the two possible routes to reach the sub network However once a certain route is used to reach a specific address this same route is always used to reach this specific address 176 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 8 Configuration attributes shdsiRouter router ripUpdatelnterval Use this attribute to set the interval the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router trans mits RIP update messages Default 00000d 00h 00m 30s Range 00000d 00h 00m 05s 00000d 00h 10m 00s Normally RIP update messages are transmitted every 30 seconds It is possible to change this interval However changing this interval will also change the lifetime of routes learnt through RIP If a RIP route is received for the last time it is declared down after 6 times the ripUpdatelnter
213. nfiguration attributes 194 what is 109 326 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Index Annex troubleshooting 127 Frame Relay 135 LAN interface 131 no a serial connection 129 no IP connection 128 PPP 136 routing 137 the configuration 130 WAN interface 133 tunnelling in a network a con figuration example 125 tunnelling basic configuration 104 U unpacking 19 using PAT over PPP with a minimum of official IP ad dresses a configuration ex ample 123 V value what is 42 W WAN encapsulation basic configuration 56 configuration attributes 163 performance attributes 256 selecting the 57 status attributes 221 WAN interface alarms 280 configuration attributes 160 performance attributes 255 status attributes 220 troubleshooting 133 WAN protocols introduction 6 warning EMC 21 ESD 21 important safety instruc tions 18 safety 18 selecting a site 20
214. nknownState coldBoot warmBoot codeConsistencyFail configConsistencyFail gt gt laninterface alarminfo linkDown gt gt waninterface alarminfo linkDown gt gt gt line alarminfo linkDown gt gt router alarminfo pingActive Chapter 11 Alarm attributes Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 275 Reference manual Alarm attributes 11 2 Introducing the alarm attributes Before discussing the alarm attributes of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router in detail some general infor mation on the alarm attributes of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is given The following gives an overview of this chapter e 11 2 1 Configuration alarm attributes on page 276 e 11 2 2 General alarm attributes on page 277 276 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Alarm attributes 11 2 1 Configuration alarm attributes shdslRouter alarmMask Use this attribute to enable or disable for each alarm of the corresponding object whether it is commu nicated to the central management system e g HP OpenView or not Alarms are always seen in the alarminfo alarm attribute of an object regardless of the masking of the alarm l e even if an alarm is set to disabled in the alarmMask of an object if the alarm condition is fulfilled then the alarm will be set to on in the alarminfo of that object However because this alarm is disabled e jt will not be sent to the central management system e g HP Ope
215. nload window select the Configuration tab and click on Add A KMA KOE following Lookin E Tma A e Select the file you want to download Are edie a e g ai T1 234001 00 E Cms2 erv ini java T TMA exe a Uninst4 isu ja SDSL TT configuration ems B TMA ini Type CONTROL in the Remote file 231 211400 E TmaCh exe field A E TmaTftp exe H Filename T211400900 Files of type All files het Cancel Remote file CONTROL Click on Open If you are currently connected to the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router without write access then you can enter a password in the Password tab which gives you write access Else leave the Password tab blank Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 14 Reference manual Downloading firmware 303 When the TMA Download window reappears click on OK Password Configuration Options A window Opens and shows the download az The download list box specifies the files that will be progress sent to the device Use the Add and Remove buttons to edit the list T2114009 00 CONTROL Remove Cancel 304 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 14 Reference manual Downloading firmware 14 2 Downloading firmware using TML When downloading with TMA over a serial link you actually evoke TML Telindus Memory Loader through TMA You can also use TML without opening TMA To download firmware to the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router using TML proce
216. nnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnanannnnnnanannnnnenene 47 5 1 Reading the configuration settings wnrerrrrnnnnanres 48 5 2 Loading the default configuration eannarennaeenvvannneenenentevananaaaananannnenaa 51 5 3 Configuring IP addresses ataman kaal apaatia 54 5 4 Configuring the line oi 3eiiiiukakka kuhi tahud kavakukalulakdul bl Sadala hades Saatjal kaa 55 5 5 Configuring the WAN encapsulation mnnenanneenennnennneneneeeenne 56 5 6 Configudng static TOUTES is veces hetke di KA na ca cael aatal laes A 69 5 7 Configuring the Routing Information Protocol nmnnrrs 77 5 8 Configuring NAT and PAAT 42 cco st cate Mian tis kalandus kes Sheekeaeters 79 529 ALOAMGUANG BAGI Graas kt an Ta kalk aa Ee e ania aA aada adis tase 92 5 10 Configuring tUnNGIING nsaria eii M kd Maia ieee nd ka 104 5 11 Configuring the priority and traffic policy mrererennnnnannennae 108 5 12 Activating the configuration wmvsnennenenenvenneeennntantannatanaananntetaada naeratan 117 6 Configuration examples nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnannnnnnnnnaaane 119 6 1 LAN extension over a PDH SDH network ternnrnnennennnenneneneenene 120 6 2 LAN extension over a Frame Relay network 0 mnnnnrs 121 6 3 Connecting a LAN to the Internet using NAT and PAT se
217. nt in both directions fullEnquirylnterval This defines the number of Status Enquiry intervals Pefault 6 that have to go by before sending a Full Status Range 1 255 Enquiry message Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 63 User manual Step by step configuration 5 5 3 Configuring the PPP encapsulation The PPP handshake The Point to Point Protocol PPP makes a handshake in two phases ee The Link Control Protocol LCP builds the link layer The IP Control Protocol IPCP prepares the exchange of IP packets During this handshake it is possible that the IP address is exchanged between the two routers IP address Description requester Telindus 1420 If neither on the LAN nor on the WAN interface an IP address has been configured SHDSL Router then the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router requests an IP address from the remote router This is an alternative to the BootP protocol to obtain an IP address remote router If the remote router requests an IP address the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router looks in its routing table and replies with the gateway address of the first route which passes the WAN interface In absence of a specific route which passes the WAN interface this may also be the default route Configuring the PPP encapsulation The most essential of the PPP encapsulation configuration is e enabling or disabling link monitoring e enabling or disabling authentication and setting
218. ntroduction 8 status attributes 226 troubleshooting 136 PPP handshake how works the 63 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Annex priority and traffic policy basic configuration 108 priority policy basic configuration 111 configuration attributes 192 what is 109 priority queue what is 109 private IP address range 80 product information 319 Q queuing routed and bridged data 109 R reading a DIP switch configuration ta ble 49 TMA attribute string 50 reading the configuration set tings 48 rear view of the device 23 relative and absolute address ing 204 relay agent 286 releasing IP addresses DHCP versus BootP 186 remarks on accessList attribute 155 bootFromFlash attribute 146 dhcpStatistics 236 host routes to local interface IP address 139 ifMtu attribute 215 ifOperStatus of the WAN in terface 133 220 messages attribute 214 natAddresses attribute 90 passwords 147 resetNat action 265 rip2Authentication attribute 154 ripv2SecretTable attribute 176 RIP authentication 78 basic configuration 77 how works 77 support 77 what is 77 router applications introduc tion 5 routing alarms 282 configuration attributes 172 performance attributes 261 status attributes 233 troubleshooting 137 routing introduction 10 S safety compliance 313 instructions 18 requirements ii sales codes 319 security correcting the security table 149 security attributes 147 selecting a
219. o ra shdslRouter lt interface gt ipNetMask Default 255 255 255 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 Use this attribute to assign an IP subnet mask to the interface The subnet mask defines the number of IP devices that may be present on the corresponding IP segment Example shdslRouter lanInterface ipAddress 192 168 47 254 and shdslRouter lanInterface ipNetMask 255 255 255 0 This means that all IP devices on the Ethernet segment have an IP address in the range from 192 168 47 1 up to 192 168 47 254 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 55 User manual Step by step configuration 5 4 Configuring the line To establish a connection over the line successfully the following attributes are essential shdsIRouter wanlnterface line channel Default central Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to determine which unit is the central unit and which the remote unit l e it determines which unit acts as master and which as slave during the synchronisation procedure Therefore set one Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router to central and its remote counterpart to remote shdsiRouter wanlnterface line speed Default auto Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to setthe line speed The speed attribute has the following values auto In auto speed mode the central and remote Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router negoti ate the speed they are going to use on the line 64Kbps Besides aut
220. o speed you can also select a fixed line speed ranging from 64Kbps up 2304Kbps to 2304Kbps in steps of 64 kbps 56 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration 5 5 Configuring the WAN encapsulation This section explains how to select the WAN encapsulation It also explains the most important attributes for configuring the encapsulation protocols The following gives an overview of this section e 5 5 1 Selecting the WAN encapsulation on page 57 e 5 5 2 Configuring the Frame Relay encapsulation on page 58 5 5 3 Configuring the PPP encapsulation on page 63 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 57 User manual Step by step configuration 5 5 1 Selecting the WAN encapsulation shdsIRouter wanlnterface encapsulation Default frameRelay Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to select the encapsulation protocol on the WAN interface The encapsulation attribute has the following values frameRelay Selects Frame Relay encapsulation Frame Relay is a synchronous communica tion protocol ppp Selects Point To Point encapsulation PPP can be synchronous or asynchronous Selects High Level Data Link Control encapsulation 58 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration 5 5 2 Configuring the Frame Relay encapsulation Use the configuration attributes dlciTable and Imi to configure the Frame Relay encapsulation What is a
221. ocol that routers use to exchange dynamic routing informa tion How does RIP work When RIP is enabled the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router advertises every 30 seconds its routing infor mation to adjacent routers It also receives the routing information from the adjacent routers With this information it adapts its routing table dynamically If after 180 seconds no information about a certain route has been received then this route is declared down If after an additional 120 seconds i e 300 seconds in total still no information about the route has been received then this route is deleted from the routing table RIP support The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router supports RIP protocol version 2 RIP version 1 is a very common rout ing protocol Version 2 includes extra features like variable subnet masks and authentication Check that the other routers in the network also use RIP protocol version 2 shdsIRouter router routingProtocol Defaultnone Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to activate or deactivate the Routing Information Protocol RIP The routingProtocol attribute has the following values No routing protocol is used Only static routes are used The RIP version 2 routing protocol is used shds Router lt interface gt ripMode Default active Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to modify the RIP behaviour of the interface By default the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router tr
222. of a single bridge For more information on port priority refer to 5 9 7 What is Spanning Tree priority and cost on page 100 pathCost This is the value that is Default 100 added to the total cost of Range 1 65535 the path to the root bridge provided that this particular port is a root port i e that the path to the root goes through this port The total cost of the path to the root bridge should not exceed 65500 For more information on path cost refer to 5 9 7 What is Spanning Tree priority and cost on page 100 topologyChange Enables or disables the Default enabled Detection communication of Span Range enabled disabled ning Tree topology changes to the root bridge Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 61 User manual Step by step configuration What is LMI LMI or Local Management Interface is used in most Frame Relay networks to exchange information between end nodes like the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router and switching nodes This information con cerns among other things flow control and link status monitoring In a Frame Relay network there are e Frame Relay Access Devices FRADs or the DTEs These encap af sulate user data into Frame Relay packets LMI Status Enguiry Frame Relay nodes or the DCEs OM Status Enquiry reply These have multiple serial interfaces and switch the Frame Relay packets The LMI exchanges packets between thes
223. ol Range 1 3000 icy method to e trafficShaping or tosMapped then only this drop level is relevant tosDiffServ then this drop level corresponds with the drop precendence bits value 00 and 01 maxLength2 maxLength3 Example Suppose This is the maximum length or drop level 2 Default 100 Range 1 3000 In case you set the attribute shdslRouter router trafficPol icy method to e trafficShaping or tosMapped then this drop level is not relevant tosDiffServ then this drop level corresponds with the drop precendence bits value 10 This is the maximum length or drop level 3 Default 100 Range 1 3000 In case you set the attribute shdslRouter router trafficPol icy method to trafficShaping or tosMapped then this drop level is not relevant tosDiffServ then this drop level corresponds with the drop precendence bits value 11 e the shdslRouter router trafficPolicy method is set to tosDiffServ e for queue 1 you set maxLength1 100 maxLength2 200 and maxLength3 50 Now the following applies Queue 1 contains data An incoming data packet with is packets less than 50 drop level 1 accepted drop level 2 accepted drop level 3 accepted more than 50 less than 100 accepted accepted dropped more than 100 less than 200 dropped accepted dropped more
224. olicy J algorithm Default fifo Use this attribute to determine which mechanism is used to queue the data Range enumerated see below when the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router experiences an overload condition The algorithm attribute has the following values fifo This is a First In First Out queue The data that enters the queue first also leaves the queue first This is the fastest but most superficial queuing mechanism roundRobin This is a priority queuing mechanism In this case all queues containing data have an equal weight disregarding the setting of the weight element in the shdslRouter router priorityPolicy JgueueConfigurations attribute absolutePriority This is a priority queuing mechanism In this case queues with a high priority have absolute priority over gueues with a low priority In other words no lower priority queue is emptied as long as a higher priority queue contains data The priority of the queues runs parallel to the queue number l e the user config urable gueue number 1 hasthe lowest priority whereas the system gueue number 7 has the highest priority For the gueue numbers refer to 5 11 2 What is a priority gueue on page 109 Note that there is a risk of starvation This means that it is possible that the lower weight gueues are never emptied because a higher weight gueue continuously receives data weightedFair Queueing Priority queuing This is a priority queuing me
225. om a TFTP server The configuration file on this TFTP can be ina binary or an ASCII format How to build such files is explained in 13 6 Creating configuration files on page 294 Getting the configuration file with TFTP The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router asks for its configuration file as follows LL IIE The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router sends a DNS reguest on the interface for which it received an IP address This reguest is a local broadcast message If it sent over the WAN link the peer router should have an IP helper address for the DNS server If no reply is received within 10 seconds this phase is repeated once more If a DNS reply is received it contains the domain name The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router only uses the hostname part of the domain name host name domain toplevel_domain 292 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router pees a E Now there are two possibilities is the router reguests the file hostname cms as a limited broad cast hostname cms is the router its configuration file in binary format If this request is sent over the WAN link the peer router should have an IP helper address for the TFTP server If no reply is received within 5 seconds the router requests the file hostname cli as a local broadcast hostname cli is the router its configuration file in ASCII format Again there is a reply time out of 5 seconds If still
226. on suc ceeds then the PPP link is built fur ther until data can be sent Else PPP starts its handshake again During data transfer it also authenticates at regular intervals refer to the config uration attribute shdsIRouter wanlnter face ppp authenPeriod on page 169 CHAP authentication in both directions sysName my name router sysSecret my secret ppp authentication CHAP router pppSecretTable name my name secret my secret PPP link 2 T router A 6 2 6 2 router B DS lt gt 2 Step 1 Router A sends a challenge packet containing its sysName sysName is defined Step 2 _ Router B sends a response using its own sysName and _ sysSecret as hashing value Step 3 Router A uses the sysName it receives from router B to look up the corresponding secret in its pppSecretTable Step 4 If the two secret names are equal then router A sends a success reply else it sends a failure reply If CHAP authentication is enabled on both routers then they both request and respond to the authenti cation If the remote router is a router from another vendor then read the documentation in order to find out how to configure the CHAP name and secret values 66 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router User manual Chapter 5 Step by step configuration kal shdslRouter router sysSecret Use this attribute for the CHAP authentication process The CHAP au
227. ormance attributes 10 6 Routing performance attributes shdsIRouter router routingTable This attribute lists all known routes and how many times they are used The routingTable contains the following elements t s s network This is the IP address of the destination network mask This is the network mask of the destination network gateway This is the IP address of the next router on the path to the destination network interface This is the interface through which the destination network can be reached Pos sible values are internal The own protocol stack is used lan The destination network can be reached through the Ethernet interface The destination network can be reached through the serial interface discard Packets for this destination are discarded This lists how many times the route has been used since it is listed in the routing table For each IP packet that matches this route the attribute value is incremented by one RIP routes may disappear from the routing table and re appear afterwards The attribute value is reset when a RIP route disappears from the routing table 262 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 rj Reference manual Performance attributes shdsIRouter router natSocketsFree This attribute shows the remaining number of new connections i e sockets that can be initiated A socket is a set of source and destination IP addresses and port numbers Ini
228. ort number try to send traffic to the same Internet destination address PAT discards this traffic It is also possible to define port ranges that PAT should always discard The port translation range PAT uses goes from 60928 up to 65535 The portTranslations table contains the following elements a 155 2 PUNSUNSUSNSSE E protocol This selects the protocol tcp or udp Default tcp Range tcp udp startPort This defines the lowest value of the TCP or UDP port Pefault 0 range Range 0 65535 endPort This defines the highest value of the TCP or UDP port Default lt Opt gt range Range 0 65535 If no endPort value is defined lt Opt gt then the port range is limited to the startPort value only action If a packet is received with a source port number in Default noTranslation the previously specified range a certain action canbe Range enumerated see below taken The action element has the following values noTranslation The port numbers that fall within the defined port range are not translated deny Packets with port numbers in that fall within the defined port range are discarded 86 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration Example of a portTranslations table TMA is an example of an application that does not support port translation Ifyou want Y portTranslations to make TMA connections from your loca
229. ouch any component or connector on the circuit board EMC WARNING EMC compliant installation The Telindus access products are fully EMC compliant To ensure compliance with EMC directive 89 336 EEC shielded cables or ferrite beads have to be used ANMERKUNG Das Ger t kann gespeist wurden durch ein IT power System 22 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 2 5 Connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router This section explains how to connect the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this section e 2 5 1 Rear view of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router on page 23 e 2 5 2 Connecting the different parts of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router on page 24 e 2 5 3 Connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router an example on page 25 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 23 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 2 5 1 Rear view of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The following is a rear view of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 24 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 2 5 2 Connecting the different parts of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The following table gives an overview of the parts located at the back of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Part Label Description 1 9 VDC This is the power input Insert the plug of the external power
230. ound as each bridge forwards the same data The TST algorithm Using the TST algorithm bridges know of each others existence By communi cating with each other they establish one single path for reaching any particu lar network segment If necessary they may decide to disable some bridges in the network in order to establish this single path This is a continuous process So if a bridge fails the remaining bridges will reconfigure their bridging tables keeping each LAN segment reachable 12 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 1 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 1 6 Layer 2 tunnelling What is the Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol The Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol L2TP is a protocol used for connecting VPNs Virtual Private Net works over public lines More specific it allows you to set up virtual PPP connections In other words an L2TP tunnel simulates an additional PPP interface which directly connects two routers with each other L2TP concrete Concrete using the Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol you can connect several private and physically dis persed local networks with each other over public lines such as the Internet in order to create one big virtual local network This without the need for address translation Example In the following example network A is virtually connected to network B through a tunnel in the public network network A network B uses private uses private addresses a
231. outer Chapter 3 User manual DIP switches and straps of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 3 1 The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router motherboard The figure below shows the position of the DIP switches and straps on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router motherboard ul Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 3 33 User manual DIP switches and straps of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 3 2 DIP switches of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The following table gives an overview of the DIP switches on DIP switch bank DS1 DIP switch name DS1 no Setting start up mode Function Start up from flash memory Start up in boot mode load default Normal operation configuration Load default configuration 34 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router User manual Chapter 3 DIP switches and straps of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 3 3 Straps of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router With strap ST1 you can configure the interconnection between signal ground and protective ground earth The following table gives an overview of the strap settings of strap ST1 Strap settings Connection Description position 1 disconnected As default the signal ground is disconnected from the earth This avoids problems which might occur when the earth potential of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router and the connected device is not the same In such a situation earth current loops may induce distortion on the trans mitted data resulting in transmission
232. outer priorityPolicy queueConfigurations attribute Example Suppose queue 1 has weight 2 queue 2 has weight 1 and both queues contain data In that case the queues are emptied in the following order queue 1 queue 1 queue 2 queue 1 queue 1 queue 2 etc Priority queuing The options roundRobin absolutePriority and weightedFairQueueing are priority queuing mechanisms In order to determine which data goes into which priority queue use the shdslRouter router trafficPolicy method attribute The queues themselves can be configured using the shdsIRouter router priorityPolicy J gueueConfigu rations attribute Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 8 193 Configuration attributes shdsiRouter router priorityPolicy countingPolicy Use this attribute to define whether the quotum of the queues is expressed in bytes or packets Default bytes Range enumerated see below shdsiRouter router priorityPolicy queueConfigurations Use this attribute to set the relative importance of the user configurable queues The queueConfigurations table contains the following elements Default lt empty gt Range table see below ee eee quotum This sets the number of bytes packets that is dequeued from the user configurable queue when the queue is addressed Default 1500 Range 1 25000 The unit of the quotum bytes or packets can be set wi
233. pEndAddress belongs to another subnet than the ipStartAddress mask This defines the client its subnet mask for the speci fied IP address range Default 255 255 255 0 Range up to 259 255 255 255 gateway This is the default gateway for the client its subnet If no gateway is specified then the gateway of the LAN channel is used Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 nameServer This is the IP address of the name server that is avail able to the client Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 tftpServer This is the IP address of the TFTP server that is avail able to the client It is the next server to use in boot trap Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 leaseTime This is the maximum time a client can lease an IP address from the specified IP address range If 00000d 00h 00m 00s default is specified then the lease time is infinite Default 00000d 00h 00m 00s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s 24855d 03h 14m 07s holdTime This is the time between two consecutive leases of an IP address l e if a client has just let go of its dynam ically assigned IP address then this same IP address can not be reassigned before the holdTime has elapsed Default 00000d 00h 00m 00s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s 24855d 03h 14m 07s 186 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes
234. pared and managed from a central site 14 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 1 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 1 8 Management tools The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is manageable in many different ways This section gives a quick overview of the various management possibilities Management Description and reference tool TMA TMA Telindus Management Application is a free Windows software package that enables you to manage the Telindus products completely 1 e to access their configuration attributes and look at status performance and alarm information For more information refer to 4 Managing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router on page 37 and the TMA manual TMA for HP OpenView TMA for HP OpenView is the management application that runs on the widely spread network management platform HP OpenView It offers the combination of the easy to use graphical interface of the stand alone version of TMA together with the advantages and features of HP OpenView For more information refer to the TMA for HP OpenView manual TMA CLI TMA CLI TMA Command Line Interface enables you to use its commands in scripts in order to automate management actions This is particularly useful in large networks TMA CLI is a complementary product to TMA and TMA for HP OpenView For more information refer to the TMA CLI manual ATWIN ATWIN is a menu driven user interface You can read and change all attrib
235. pos Default 00000d 00h 00m 15s Range 00000d 00h 00m 04s 00000d 00h 00m 30s sible states of a bridge port refer to Bridge port states on page 200 the time out or ageing for purging MAC addresses from the bridge cache in case a topology change is detected kal shdsIRouter bridge bridgeTimeOut Use this attribute to change the time out or ageing for MAC addresses learned by the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router When this time out expires the MAC address is purged from the address database also called bridge cache This in case no topology change is detected otherwise the time out is equal to the value of the shdslRouter bridge spanningTree bridgeForwardDelay element Default 00000d 00h 05m 00s 24855d 03h 14m 07s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s 199 200 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes Bridge port states There are four possible states a bridge port can be in State A port inthis state blocking does no frame forwarding e does not incorporate station location into its address database There is no learning on a blocking port so there is no MAC address database update e receives BPDUs but does not process or propagate them A bridge always enters the blocking state following bridge initialisation listening does no frame forwarding does not incorporate station location into its address database There is no lea
236. pped with only one flash memory bank this attribute has no function To verify how many flash memory banks are present in the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router check the status attribute shdsIRouter flashVersions Use this attribute to select which flash memory bank is active In case the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is equipped with two flash memory banks each bank can con tain a complete firmware version but only one version can be active This allows you to download a new firmware version in the non active flash bank while the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router continues opera tion from the active flash bank It also allows you to switch between two different firmware versions The bootFromFlash attribute has the following values When the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router boots flash memory bank 1 is active flash memory bank 2 is active the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router automatically chooses the flash memory bank containing the most recent firmware It does this by comparing the firmware ver sion numbers shdsIRouter lt configurationAlarmAttributes gt For more information on the configuration alarm attributes alarmMask and alarmLevel and on the alarms in general refer to 11 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 275 For more information on the alarms of the shdslRouter object refer to 11 3 General alarms on page 278 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 147 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdsIRou
237. present in the ARP cache table yet the Tel indus 1420 SHDSL Router sends an ARP request on the Ethernet to learn the MAC address and asso ciated IP address of the destination device This address pair is then written in the ARP cache Once the address pair is present the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router can reference to this pair if it has to send an IP packet to the same device later on The ARP cache time out Summarised all the MAC address IP address pairs from ARP requests and replies received on the LAN interface are kept in the ARP cache However if devices on the network are reconfigured then this MAC address IP address relation may change Therefore the ARP cache entries are automatically removed from the cache after a fixed time out This time out period can be set with arpTimeOut attribute shdsIRouter laninterface directedBroadcasts Default enabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to enable forward or disable discard directed broad casts Directed broadcasts are IP packets destined for a complete sub network For example a packet des tined for all devices on sub network 192 168 48 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 will have destination address 192 168 48 255 l e all ones in the subnet area of the IP address Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 159 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdslRouter lanInterface ipHelpers Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use t
238. pter 4 39 User manual Managing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 4 2 Connecting through the auxiliary connector To established a connection between TMA and the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router through the auxiliary connector proceed as follows w poo S Connect a serial port of your com puter e g COM1 through a straight DB9 male female cable with the auxiliary connector of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Start TMA In the TMA window either select from the menu bar Connect Mee Device Please specify haw to reach the device you wish to connect to Serial comi v or click on the Connect to device button ert Gir C PSTN modem or press the short cut key Ctrl N C Pe E The Connect to a device window is being dis played as in the following figure C IPaddess Security Specify the password for connecting to this device This field may be left open Password gt Cancel In the Connect to a device window specify the following e Select the option Serial and specify the COM port of your computer to which the Tel indus 1420 SHDSL Router is connected Ifa password has previously been configured in the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router then also fill in the password field Click on the Next gt button gt After a couple of seconds the attributes of the selected Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router appear in the TMA window 40 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 4
239. r The usedProcPower table contains the following elements Benet Bessie O sysUpTime This is the elapsed time since the last cold boot The next values are for the 30 seconds period before this relative time stamp min This is the minimum percentage of processing power in use during the last 30 sec onds average This is the average percentage of processing power in use during the last 30 sec onds max is the maximum percentage of processing power in use during the last 30 sec onds shdslRouter operatingSystem freeDataBuffers The processor uses buffers for storing the packets during processing and or queuing Each buffer has a 256 byte size headers included This attribute is the number of data buffers currently not in use and available for e g incoming data shdsIRouter operatingSystem totalDataBuffers This attribute displays the total number of available data buffers shdsIRouter operatingSystem largestFreeBlockSize The processor uses RAM memory for storing internal information and buffering The different tasks allo cate RAM memory on reguest Tasks may also free memory again In this way the total RAM memory becomes fragmented This attribute gives the size ofthe largest contiguous free memory block expressed in bytes shdsIRouter operatingSystem freeBlockCount This attribute displays the number of free contiguous memory blocks Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 101271 Ref
240. r it allows more selective filtering of traffic and has priority over the simple access lists on the same interface The entries in an extended access list indicate the traffic that is allowed Traffic that is not covered by an entry in the extended access list is filtered out The extendedAccessList table contains the following elements KES pe O O OO O sourcelpStart This is the IP source address as specified in the IP Default 0 0 0 0 Address header Range up to 255 255 255 255 sourcelpEnd Address destinationlpStart This is the IP destination address as specified in the Default 0 0 0 0 Address IP header Range up to 255 255 255 255 destinationlpEnd Address ipProtocol This is the protocol field from the IP header Default any Range 0 255 You can specify the protocol by typing the protocol number For ease of use some common protocols can be selected from a drop down box any 0 ICMP 1 IGMP 2 IPinIP 4 TCP 6 EGP 8 IGP 9 UDP 17 RSVP 46 IGRP 88 OSPFIGP 89 TCPestablished 255 When selecting TCPestablished the flags in the TCP header are also checked If a SYN flag is present without an ACK flag then the packet is filtered out This con dition is met only for the first packet of a TCP connection It allows to control which side initiates a connection sourcePortStart This is the source port as specified in the UDP TCP Default any star
241. r Activate Configuration If you execute this action the editable non active configuration becomes the active configuration This action corresponds with the TMA button Send all attributes to device 4 md When use this action Use this action after you made all the necessary configuration settings and you want to activate these settings shdsIRouter Load Saved Configuration If you execute this action the non active configuration is overwritten by the active configuration currently used by the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router After executing this action click on the TMA button Retrieve all attributes from device wap to see the new non active configuration When use this action If you are in the progress of modifying the non active configuration but made some mistakes then use this action to revert to the active configuration Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 151 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdslRouter Load Default Configuration If you execute this action the non active configuration is overwritten by the default configuration After executing this action click on the TMA button Retrieve all attributes from device yyp to see the new non active configuration When use this action If you install the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router for the first time all configuration attributes have their default values If the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router has already been configured but you want to start from s
242. r manual Step by step configuration 5 1 1 DIP switch configuration table A DIP switch configuration table has the following layout 1 on off The following table explains the DIP switch configuration table layout E This position displays the DIP switch icon It indicates that the table which follows is a DIP switch configuration table 1 the DIP switch name the DIP switch position on the DIP switch bank The abbreviations mean the following DS1 no 1 DIP switch bank number 1 switch position number 1 the possible settings ofthe DIP switch on and off The default setting is printed in bold the function associated with the corresponding DIP switch setting 50 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration 5 1 2 TMA attribute string A TMA attribute string has the following A r top Object Nametobject NamevattributeName default defaultValue 1 2 3 The following table explains the TMA attribute string layout E This position displays the TMA attribute icon It indicates that the string which follows is a TMA attribute string Two different TMA attribute icons exist abasic attribute icon an advanced attribute icon For more information refer to Graphical conventions on page vii the attribute name and its position in the containment tree In the figure above the string shdslRouter lanInterface ipAddress means the following
243. r of frames received from the network indicating backward con gestion and this since the virtual circuit was created inDe This is the number of frames received with the Discard Eligibility bit set inOctets This is the number of octets received over this virtual circuit since it was created inFrames This is the number of frames received over this virtual circuit since it was created outFecn This is the number of frames sent to the network indicating forward congestion and this since the virtual circuit was created outBecn outDe This is the number of frames sent to the network indicating backward congestion and this since the virtual circuit was created This is the number of frames sent to the network with the Discard Eligibility bit set outOctets This is the number of octets sent over this virtual circuit since it was created outFrames This is the number of frames sent over this virtual circuit since it was created ra shdsIRouter wanlnterface frameRelay climinFrames This attribute displays the total number of received CLLM frames Chapter 10 257 258 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Performance attributes 10 5 Line performance attributes ra shdsIRouter wanlnterface line h2Line This attribute displays the 2 hours information summary of the line The h2Line table contains the following elements Element e For the corresponding period
244. rce Port Number is replaced by a specific port number All traffic from this source IP address port number pair is assigned this specific port number If there is no traffic for 5 to 10 minutes the specific port number is freed Each ICMP packet is forwarded towards the Internet Each ICMP packet is consid ered as a new session If there is no traffic for 5 to 10 minutes the session is closed The fact that it is possible to open a total of 2048 simultaneous sessions and that each ICMP packet is considered as a new session implies that for instance a con tinuous series of ping requests at a rate of one per second will allocate between 300 and 600 sessions 82 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration Suppose the WAN IP network depicted in Example of a network topology for Internet connection on page 82 works in numbered mode The incoming traffic from the Internet may be destined either for the local network or for the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router itself The router treats incoming traffic on the PAT address as follows The route replies on this request Transport protocol Echo request Search corresponding request and send to TCP UDP originator Send to originator that caused the error Router error message Destination IP address PAT address AND The router forwards the port number previously packet after IP address port
245. relay agent This means it adds additional informa tion to the request packets allowing servers on distant networks to send back the answer This feature is not used in the auto install procedure Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 287 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 13 2 Getting the IP address over the LAN interface The following figure shows how the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router obtains its LAN IP address from a BootP server on its Ethernet interface Server file contains e g ar 00 C0 89 00 94 6F and BootP server 192 168 47 254 255 255 255 0 Router IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 The IP address is obtained as follows JEL TI EI In case on the LAN interface no ipAddress or ipNetMask is configured i e still at their default value then the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router starts sending BootP reguests containing its MAC address on the LAN interface every 10 seconds The BootP server looks in its MAC address IP address file If the MAC address in the BootP request matches a MAC address in this file the BootP server replies with the cor responding IP address and subnet mask Example In the example above the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router its MAC address is 00 C0 89 00 94 6F The server replies with IP address 192 168 47 254 and correspond ing subnet mask 255 255 255 0 The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router uses this received IP address as its LAN IP address
246. ress is continuously assigned to a server with IP address 192 168 47 250 The others are nat ddresses assigned dynamically EE Tie ne Fi 195 7 12 21 192 168 47 250 b 2 1957 12 22 lt Opt gt gt 3 1957 12 23 lt Opt gt b 4 1957 12 24 lt Opt gt 88 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 rj 9 User manual Step by step configuration shdslRouter router natGateways Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to define the gateway addresses from routes on which NAT or PAT should be applied For more information refer to shdslRouter router natGateways on page 85 Important remark using NAT on the LAN interface Suppose the following configuration e shdsIRouter laninterface ipAddress 172 31 74 1 e shdsIRouter router natAddresses first row officialAddress 172 31 74 1 privateAddress lt opt gt shdsIRouter wanlnterface ipAddress 2 2 2 2 The above means that NAT is used on the LAN interface and the router uses the address 172 31 74 1 as official IP address The problem that arises here is that the router can no longer be managed via the LAN interface using the management tool TMA Telnet etc This because the NAT route has priority over the LAN route and because itis a NAT address the router does not accept incoming traffic on the address 172 31 74 1 The solution is to add the WAN IP address to the natAddresses table as private address shdslRouter ro
247. ributes on page 267 10 9 Management performance attributes on page 268 10 10 Operating system performance attributes on page 270 250 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 10 Performance attributes 10 1 Performance attributes overview gt shdslRouter gt gt lanInterface iflnOctets iflnUcastPkts iflnNUcastPkts iflnDiscards iflnErrors iflnUnknownProtos ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts ifOutNUcastPkts ifOutDiscards ifOutErrors ifOutQLen bridgeAccessList h2Performance h24Performance gt gt wanlnterface iflnOctets iflnUcastPkts iflnNUcastPkts iflnDiscards iflnErrors iflnUnknownProtos ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts ifOutNUcastPkts ifOutDiscards ifOutErrors ifOutQLen bridgeAccessList h2Performance h24Performance gt gt gt frameRelay Imi dlciTable cllmInFrames gt gt gt line h2Line h24Line d7Line line gt gt gt gt linePair 1 h2LineParameters h2Performance h24LineParameters h24Performance d7LineParameters d7Performance lineParameters performance gt gt router routingTable natSocketsFree natAllocFails natDiscards natAddressesAvailable natTcpSocketsUsed natUdpSocketsUsed natlempSocketsUsed natTcpAllocs natUdpAllocs natlcmpAllocs pingResults Action startPing Action stopPing Action resetNat gt gt gt tunnels I2tpTunnels gt gt bridge bridgeCache bridgeDiscards bridgeFloods gt gt management cms2SessionCoun
248. rning on a listening port so there is no MAC address database update receives and processes BPDUs but does not propagate them learning does no frame forwarding incorporates station location into its MAC address database receives processes and propagates BPDUs forwarding forwards frames incorporates station location into its MAC address database receives processes and propagates BPDUs Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 201 Reference manual Configuration attributes Bridge port state transition diagram The following figure shows how a bridge port moves through the different states when the bridge is pow ered Power on initialisation Blocking state Listening Disabled state 777 state Forward delay Learning state Forward delay Forwarding state When you enable Spanning Tree every bridge in the network goes through the transitory states of lis tening and learning at power up If properly configured each port stabilises to the forwarding or blocking state When the spanning tree algorithm places a port in the forwarding state the following process occurs 1 The port is put into the listening state while it waits for protocol information that suggests it should go to the blocking state 2 The port waits for the expiration of the forward delay timer moves the port to the learning state and resets the forward delay timer 3 In the l
249. roper data link This because the link monitoring mechanism is the only PPP mecha nism that will start a renegotiation of the LCP layer Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 221 Reference manual Status attributes 9 5 WAN encapsulation status attributes This section discusses the status attributes of the encapsulation protocols that can be used on the WAN interface The following gives an overview of this section 9 5 1 Frame Relay status attributes on page 222 e 9 5 2 PPP status attributes on page 226 9 5 3 HDLC status attributes on page 231 222 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 Reference manual Status attributes 9 5 1 Frame Relay status attributes ra shdslRouter laninterface frameRelay mi This attribute gives a complete LMI status information overview The Imi structure contains the following elements ES peen This displays the LMI variant Possible values are noLmiConfigured No LMI is in use ImiRev1 LMI revision 1 is in use ansit1 617 d ANSI LMI is in use q933 Annex A ITU T LMI is in use This displays the current state of LMI Possible values are LMI messages can and are exchanged No LMI messages can be exchanged lastStateChange This is the system up time when the LMI state entered its current state l e the moment the value of the state element changes from up to down or vice versa the system up time value is written into the lastStateChange element
250. router trafficPolicy trafficShaping Default lt empty gt Range table see below In case you have set the shdslRouter router trafficPolicy method attribute to traf ficShaping then use the trafficShaping table to specify which data has to be redirected to which queue The trafficShaping table can be compared with an access list You can filter based on several criteria IP source and destination address TOS value etc A packet is redirected to the specified queue when the criteria are met and an overload condition occurs When more than one entry applies to the same packet then only the most specific one is taken in consideration l e the entry covering the smallest range The trafficShaping table contains the following elements ES peen sourcelpStart This is the IP source address as specified in the IP _ Default 0 0 0 0 Address header Range up to 255 255 255 255 sourcelpEnd Address destination pStart This is the IP destination address as specified in the Defauit 0 0 0 0 Address IP header Range up to 255 255 255 255 destinationlpEnd Address tosStartValue This is the Type Of Service field value Default any start optional end tosEndtValue Range 0 256 ipProtocol This is the protocol field from the IP header Default any You can specify the protocol by typing the protocol __ Range 0 255 number For ease of use some common
251. rview on page 45 38 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 4 1 Introducing TMA What is the Telindus Maintenance Application TMA is a free Windows software package that enables you to maintain the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router i e to access its configuration attributes and look at status performance and alarm information using a user friendly graphical user interface TMA is an excellent tool for complete management of the Telindus access devices When using TMA in combination with a network management system such as HP OpenView complete networks can be managed from one central site Consult the TMA user manual to install it and get acquainted with the TMA user interface You will need a new version of the model file distribution if changes have been made to the attributes of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The most recent model files and TMA engine can always be down loaded from the Telindus web site Go to http www telindus com accessproducts and select Products Maintenance 8 Management Download TMA software How to connect TMA There are two ways to establish a connection between the computer running TMA and the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router e through a serial connection i e through the auxiliary connector of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router e through an IP connection i e through the LAN connector of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Cha
252. s nnmenensenntennenannenaneetaanananannanaaa 267 10 9 Management performance attributes 0 nenennnenennnnnnnnnennnanaa 268 10 10 Operating system performance attributes rremennnnennnnnan 270 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Table of contents xi User and reference manual 11 Alarm attributes ssia ae hae ee niidu 273 11 1 Alarm attributes overview wnnmenennennennnnnnnnenentnnentannannnennenenanannaneee 274 11 2 Introducing the alarm altribuleS 10 10 teetu kata Jehe data t male Saika 275 1459 General AAS i tasa aariate 278 11 4 LAN interface alarms udu ho stieita na bahu Miecsdabtiqhed teh intl hakaku alaku bad alal Makadi 279 11 5 MAN intetface alam Since cecil Ai hin Rana ea ONE 280 008 230 191 2372112 lg tes sige cts aah acter A tah sec cls betta abu sale NAERMA 281 11 7 Routing ALANIS sari direkt aitan alpi S le sale edad alad kulu gee 282 12 TMA sub system picture nnnenennnnnnnnnnnanananaennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnna 283 13 Auto installing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router mn annan 285 13 14 Whatis BOotP and DHCP isikult a a e i E 286 13 2 Getting the IP address over the LAN interface mnemnnrs 287 13 3 Getting the IP address over a PPP WAN link irrnrrns 288 13 4 Getting the IP address over a Frame Relay WAN link
253. s wrrrrrnn 21 2 5 Connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router nenrnrs 22 2 6 The front panel LED indicators rerrrrmmmmt 26 3 DIP switches and straps of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 31 3 1 The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router motherboard mnnnnneenenennanne 32 3 2 DIP switches of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router mrese 33 3 3 Straps of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Routel cc cccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 34 3 4 Changing DIP switch and strap settings wmeernrrrs 35 4 Managing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 37 4 1 Introducing TMA sreci eeii sees cnueqata make t k tel kt Agaue 38 4 2 Connecting through the auxiliary connector rrrnmnrrs 39 4 3 C rnneeling 0ver arulPASOMGIK 1 icc ccsocnec alaanid um Maata anta 40 4 4 Introducing the management terminology 0 0 nnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnan nn nnanna 41 4 5 The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router containment tree mneermnmna 44 4 6 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router attribute overview wwwwrraa 45 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Table of contents ix User and reference manual 5 Step by step configuration eeenernnnnnnn
254. s gt shdslRouter the general system attributes It is the top object in the containment tree E g the configuration attributes sysName sysContact and sysLocation gt gt laninterface the attributes of the LAN interface E g the configuration attributes ipAddress ipNetMask and secondarylpAd dresses gt gt waninterface the attributes of the WAN interface E g the configuration attributes ipAddress ipNetMask and encapsulation gt gt gt frameRelay the attributes related with the Frame Relay encapsulation on the WAN interface E g the configuration attributes dlciTable and Imi gt gt gt ppp the attributes related with the PPP encapsulation on the WAN interface E g the configuration attributes linkMonitoring and authentication gt gt gt hdic gt gt gt line the attributes related with the HDLC encapsulation on the WAN interface the general attributes of the line E g the configuration attribute speed gt gt gt gt linePair 1 the specific line attributes E g the status attribute lineAttenuation gt gt router the attributes concerning the routing itself E g the configuration attribute routingTable gt gt gt tunnels the attributes concerning the layer 2 tunnelling gt gt bridge the attributes concerning the bridging functionality E g the configuration attribute spanningTree
255. s I2tpTunnels I2tp on page 190 106 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration 5 11 Configuring the priority and traffic policy This section explains how you can configure the priority and traffic policy on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router First it gives an introduction Then it shows how to add the priorityPolicy and trafficPolicy objects to the containment tree The following gives an overview of this section e 5 11 1 What is priority policy on page 109 5 11 2 What is a priority queue on page 109 5 11 3 Queuing routed and bridged data on page 109 5 11 4 What is traffic policy on page 109 e 5 11 5 Adding a policy object on page 110 e 5 11 6 Configuring the priority policy on page 111 5 11 7 Configuring the traffic policy on page 113 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 107 User manual Step by step configuration 5 11 1 What is priority policy The purpose of a priority policy is to determine on overload conditions the data that will be given the highest priority i e serviced first and discarded last Priority policy may be used in a variety of ways e g to ensure that voice video or other streaming media is serviced before or after other traffic types to ensure that web response traffic is routed before normal web browsing traffic etc 5 11 2 What is a priority queue A mechanism used in priority policy is priority queuing This means that the user can
256. s of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router T LINDUS 1420 SHDSL Router TST TXD 6 RXD Ten RAA COL LED status modes For some front panel LED indicators different status modes exist These status modes can be distin guished by the way the LED is lit up LED status LED duty cycle Description continuously off 0 The LED never lights up continuously on The LED lights up continuously blinking The LED is as much lit as it is out flashing The LED only lights up during 20 of the time mostly off The LED occasionally lights up without a fixed duty cycle mostly on The LED occasionally goes out without a fixed duty cycle monitoring The LED lights up irregularly For instance it lights up on detection of a certain signal 1 e it monitors this signal 28 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 2 6 2 The power LED PWR The power LED indicates the following continuously off No DC input power is available blinking When the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router boots it performs a selftest If this test fails the power LED blinks and the TST TXD and RXD LEDs light up continuously The power LED also blinks briefly when the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router switches from running in boot mode to normal flash memory operation continuously on The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is powered and the boot sequence has been completed success
257. s only change if the alarms related to the interface object are set to enabled in the alarmMask 284 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 Reference manual TMA sub system picture Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 285 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 13 Auto installing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Auto install includes a number of features that allow you to partially or completely configure the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router without on site intervention This can be particularly useful since the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is located at the edge of the access network Its configuration can be retrieved over the WAN from a central server Auto install is made possible by using a number of standardised protocols as there are BootP DHCP TFTP and Frame Relay LMI The following gives an overview of this chapter 13 1 What is BootP and DHCP on page 286 e 13 2 Getting the IP address over the LAN interface on page 287 e 13 3 Getting the IP address over a PPP WAN link on page 288 e 13 4 Getting the IP address over a Frame Relay WAN link on page 289 e 13 5 Getting the configuration with TFTP on page 291 e 13 6 Creating configuration files on page 294 286 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 13 1 Whatis BootP and DHCP BootP and DHCP are very similar protocols IP devices without IP address use them to obtain an IP ad
258. s the stand by path How is a root bridge selected All bridges in the network participating in Spanning Tree gather information about other bridges in the network They do this through an exchange of data messages called Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs This exchange of messages results in the following phases e e The selection of a root bridge The bridge with the highest bridge priority i e the lowest numerical priority value is selected as the root bridge If all bridges are configured with the default priority 32768 the bridge with the lowest MAC address becomes the root bridge The selection of a designated bridge for every bridged LAN segment The removal of loops in the bridged network by blocking bridge ports connected to redun dant links Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 95 User manual Step by step configuration 5 9 5 Spanning Tree topology The cost factor is used to calculate the distance from each port of a bridge to the root bridge On the basis of this each port on a bridge is assigned one of the following states Fc root port The port that is closest to the root bridge Only one port on each bridge is assigned as the root port designated port The port that connects to bridges further away from the root bridge The root bridge only has designated ports blocking If a port is not assigned a root port or a designated port state they are assigned a blocking state Frames
259. s with their operating status This information is retrieved from the con figured IP addresses the static routes and the interface status The routingTable contains the following elements a a network This is the IP address of the destination network mask This is the network mask of the destination network gateway This is the IP address of the next router on the path to the destination network interface This is the interface through which the destination network can be reached Pos sible values are internal The own protocol stack is used lan The destination network can be reached through the Ethernet interface The destination network can be reached through the serial interface discard Packets for this destination are discarded encapsulation This indicates the used encapsulation It is related to the interface for this route Possible values are none The IP packets are not encapsulated ethernet The IP packets are encapsulated with the ARPA MAC header frameRelay The IP packets are encapsulated in Frame Relay RFC 1490 ppp The IP packets are encapsulated in PPP x25 The IP packets are encapsulated in X 25 138 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Troubleshooting KES ossempion OOO O status This is the route status Possible values are up The route can be used down The route is currently not in use discard Packets for this desti
260. security priorityPolicy alarmMask trafficPolicy alarmLevel metric Action Activate Configuration ripMode Action Load Saved Configuration rip2Authentication Action Load Default Configuration accessList Action Cold Boot extendedAccessList bridgeAccessList gt gt laninterface directedBroadcasts ipAddress ipHelpers ipNetMask splitHorizon secondarylpAddresses encapsulation routing alarmMask metric alarmLevel ripMode rip2Authentication gt gt gt frameRelay accessList dlciTable extendedAccessList Imi bridgePortInfo bridgeAccessList gt gt gt ppp arpTimeOut i linkMonitoring directedBroadcasts authentication ipHelpers authenPeriod sendicmpRedirect routing lanWanStatusCoupling bridgePortInfo alarmMask alarmLevel gt gt gt hdlc bridgePortlnfo gt gt gt line channel speed retrain alarmMask alarmLevel Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 81145 Reference manual Configuration attributes gt gt router defaultRoute routingTable routingProtocol altemativeRoutes ripUpdatelnterval ripv2SecretTable gt gt management sysSecret l cms2Address pppSecretTable accessList helperProtocols snmp sendTtlExceeded telnet sendPortUnreachable tftp sendAdminUnreachable i consoleNoTrafficTimeOut ctriPortProtocol alarmFilter gt gt snmpProxy trapDestinations mib2Traps patAddress portTranslations servicesAvailable natAddresses natGateways natTcpSocketTimeOut nat
261. several standards Default q933 Annex A for the LMI protocol with small variations between Range enumerated see below them Therefore you should configure the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router according to the standard that is used by your service pro vider The type attribute has the following values noLmiConfigured No LMI is used ImiRev1 Set this value only for compatibility with older equip ment ansit1 617 d Set this value for ANSI LMI compliance q933 Annex A Set this value for ITU T LMI compliance pollinginterval This defines the time between successive Status Default 00000d 00h 00m 10s Enquiry messages Range 00000d 00h 00m 05s 00000d 00h 00m 30s errorThreshold This defines the maximum number of unanswered Default 3 Status Enguiry messages that the Telindus 1420 Range 1 10 SHDSL Router will accept before declaring the inter face down See also the attribute monitoredEvents Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 167 Reference manual Configuration attributes a Ce monitoredEvents This defines the number of status polling intervals Default 4 over which the error threshold is counted Range 1 10 In other words ifthe station receives an errorThreshold number of unanswered Sta tus Enquiry messages within a monitoredEvents number of pollinginterval intervals then the interface is declared down Example If the station receives 3 unanswered
262. st This is the cost of the path from this bridge to the root bridge If this bridge is the root bridge the rootPathCost value equals 0 Else the rootPathCost value equals the sum of the path cost as it is up to the designated bridge for the LAN that is currently connected to this port this cost is transmitted in Configuration BPDUs by the designated bridge and the path cost as it is configured for the root port The rootPathCost element is used e to test the value of the root path cost parameter conveyed in received Config uration BPDUs e as the value of the root path cost parameter in transmitted Configuration BPDUs rootPort This is the port identifier of the port that offers the lowest cost path to the root If two or more ports offer equal least cost paths to the root bridge then the root port is selected to be that with the highest designatedPriority i e the lowest numerical value If two or more ports offer equal least cost paths to the root bridge and the same designatedPriority then the root port is selected to be that with the highest designatedPortPriority i e the lowest numerical value bridgePriority bridgeMAC Together these two attributes form the unique bridge identifier of this bridge maxAge This is the time out value to be used by all bridges in the bridged LAN for discard ing bridging information The maxAge element displays the value as it is set by the root
263. supply in this socket me This is the protective ground connection PGND Ensure that the unit and its connected equipment all use the same PGND on order to reduce noise interference and possible safety hazards caused by dif ferences in earth potentials 3 LAN This RJ45 Twisted Pair Interface TPI is the connection towards the LAN Connect one side of an RJ45 to RJ45 cable to the LAN connector of the Telin dus 1420 SHDSL Router and the other side to a network outlet If you want to connect the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router to e a regular Ethernet network outlet then use a crossed RJ45 cable an Ethernet hub then use a straight RJ45 cable For more information on this connector refer to 15 3 Ethernet LAN interface on page 311 4 AUX This female 9 pin subD connector is the auxiliary connector You can connect this connector to a COM port of your PC with a straight male female DB9 cable This enables you to manage the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router locally using TMA CLI ATWIN etc You can also connect this connec tor to the Orchid 1003 LAN also for management purposes For more information on this connector refer to 15 5 Auxiliary connector on page 312 5 LINE This RJ12 connector is the connection towards the SHDSL line Connect one side of an RJ12 to RJ12 cable to the LINE connector of the Telin dus 1420 SHDSL Router and the other side to an SHDSL outlet Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 User manu
264. t tftpSessionCount cliSessionCount tcpSessionCount Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 101251 Reference manual Performance attributes gt gt operatingSystem currUsedProcPower usedProcPower freeDataBuffers totalDataBuffers largestFreeBlockSize freeBlockCount freeMemory totalMemory taskinfo 252 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Performance attributes 10 2 LAN interface performance attributes ra shdslRouter laninterface ifInOctets This attribute displays the number of octets bytes received on this interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra shdslRouter laninterface iflnUcastPkts This attribute displays the number of unicast packets received on this interface and delivered to a higher layer protocol Unicast packets are all non multicast and non broadcast packets This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra shdslRouter laninterface ifInNUcastPkts This attribute displays the number of non unicast packets received on this interface and delivered to a higher layer protocol Non unicast packets are all the multicast and broadcast packets This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter 4 shdslRouter laninterface iflnDiscards This attribute displays the number of incoming packets that were discarded to prevent their deliverance to a higher layer protocol This even though no errors were detected in these packets This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra shdslRouter laninterface ifInErrors T
265. t LMI command frame sent towards the router userRxSeqNr This is the sequence number of the last LMI response frame received from the router userErrors This is the number of errors on LMI commands issued by the router during the last monitoredEvents period userWaitFullEnquiry This is the number of LMI frames still to be sent before a Full Status Enquiry will be requested userLastReport TypeSent This displays the type of the most recent report that was sent Possible values are full status The last report contained the full status link integrity The last report only contained the link integrity informa tion 224 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 9 Status attributes ra shdslRouter laninterface frameRelay diciTable This attribute gives the complete status information of all known DLCls The dlciTable table contains the following elements a A PSE OA dlci This is the DLCI identification number committedBurst Displays the current CIR value for the corresponding DLCI When no BECNs Backward Explicit Congestion Notifications are received then this value is the same as the initialised value For dynamically added DLCls no CIR values are known excessBurst Displays the initialised EIR value For dynamically added DLCls no EIR values are known gateway This is the IP address of the corresponding gateway local This is the address used in
266. t optional end headers Range 0 65535 sourcePortEnd You can specify the port by typing the protocol number For ease of use some common port numbers can be selected from a drop down box any or optional 0 echo 7 discard 9 ftp data 20 ftp 21 telnet 23 smtp 25 domain 53 www http 80 pop3 110 nntp 119 snmp 161 snmptrap 162 239 50 210 syslog 514 router 520 socks 1080 I2tp 1701 telindus 1728 destinationPortStart This is the destination port as specified in the UDP Default any start optional end TCP headers Range 0 65535 destinationPortEnd You can specify the port by typing the protocol number For ease of use some common port numbers can be selected from a drop down box see above Start and end values Except for the IP protocol field it is possible to specify ranges using the start and end values There are two special cases e A start value is entered but no end value gt an exact match is needed for the start value Neither a start nor an end value is entered the field is not checked Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 8 157 Configuration attributes shdsIRouter laninterface bridgePortlnfo Use this attribute to set the bridging attributes of the interface Default Range structure see below The bridgePortlnfo structure contains the following elements SN SENINE
267. tatus attributes shdsiRouter router tunnels I2tpTunnels This attribute gives you status information on the L2TP tunnels The I2tpTunnels table contains the following elements e eee a This is the name of the tunnel as you defined it in the configuration attribute I2tpTunnels ifOperStatus This displays the operational status of the tunnel Possible values are up The tunnel is up data transfer is possible down The tunnel is down data transfer is not possible dormant The tunnel is stand by As soon as data has to be sent over the tunnel control connect messages are exchanged and operational status of the tunnel becomes up ifLastChange This is the system up time on the moment the interface entered its current opera tion state l e the moment the value of the ifOperStatus status attribute changes from up to down or vice versa the system up time value is written into the ifLastChange status attribute This structure displays the IP address information of the tunnel The ip structure contains the following elements Ca TIES ipAddress This is the IP address of the local side of the PPP con nection inside of the tunnel as you configured it in the configuration structure 2tpTunnels ip ipNetMask This is the IP subnet mask of the local side of the PPP connection inside of the tunnel as you configured it in the configuration structure 2tpTunnels ip 238 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter
268. tection IP class of protection against solid and liquids IP40 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 315 Annex Annex 316 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Annex Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Annex Annex A 317 common TCP and UDP numbers Annex A common TCP and UDP numbers The following table shows the port numbers for a number of common protocols using TCP and UDP as transport protocol As far as possible the same port numbers are used for TCP as for UDP A complete list can be found in the RFCs Requests For Comment ftp data UDP TCP TCP Description File Transfer Default Data ftp TCP File Transfer Control telnet TCP Telnet smtp TCP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol time UDP TCP Time Server nameserver UDP Host Name Server domain UDP TCP Domain Name Server tacacs ds UDP TCP TACACS Database Service bootps UDP Bootstrap Protocol Server bootpc UDP Bootstrap Protocol Client tftp UDP Trivial File Transfer www http TCP World Wide Web HTTP nntp TCP Network News Transfer Protocol netbios ns UDP NETBIOS Name Service netbios dgm UDP NETBIOS Datagram Service netbios ssn UDP NETBIOS Session Service snmp UDP SNMP snmptrap UDP SNMPTRAP telindus UDP Telindus Protocol used by TMA 318 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Annex A Annex co
269. ter Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes 8 13 Management configuration attributes kal shdsIRouter management cms2Address Default 0 Range 0 65535 Use this attribute to assign an absolute address to the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router What is relative and absolute addressing If you want to connect with TMA to a Telindus device you have to specify the address of the device in the Connect window Refer to 4 Managing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router on page 37 There are two different address types relative and absolute The following table explains the difference between these address types relative This type of addressing is meant for a network topology where the Telindus devices are connected in line on management level l e with extended manage ment links between two Telindus devices An extended management link is real ised with a cross connect cable between the auxiliary connectors of two Telindus devices C extended management connection 4 MN M M ke PC running relative 0 relative 1 relative 2 relative 3 TMA To enable relative addressing no address has to be specified in the modem absolute This type of addressing is meant for a network topology where the Telindus devices are not connected in line on management level l e when there is a digital multi point device present digital _ multipoint example V absolute 10 lamm NN SS A example PC runnin a absolute 2
270. ter on page 37 Execute the Load Saved Configuration action Change the password and or access rights in the security table Execute the Activate Configuration action Again disconnect the power supply and open the housing Reset DIP switch bank DS1 position 2 to on Properly replace the cover and reconnect the power supply 150 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 8 Configuration attributes Configuration types This section explains the different configuration types that are present in the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Which are the configuration types Three types of configuration are present in the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router e the non active configuration e the active configuration e the default configuration Explaining the configuration types When you configure the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router with TMA the following happens Connect the computer running TMA to the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The non active configuration is displayed on the screen Modify the non active configuration The modifications have no immediate influ ence on the active configuration currently used by the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Complete the modifications on the non active configuration The non active configuration has to be acti vated Execute the Activate Configuration action The non active configuration becomes the active configuration shdslRoute
271. ter router trafficPolicy J trafficShaping tosDiffServ The data is redirected to the queues based on DiffServ refer to RFC2597 regard ing class and drop precedence This means that depending on their Type Of Service TOS field some packets are moved to other queues and or dropped sooner than other packets in case the queue is full The highest 3 bits of the TOS field are mapped as follows 000 up to 100 queues 1 up to 5 respectively 101 and higher the low delay queue The next 2 bits define the drop precedence Bit values correspond with 00 and 01 maxLength1 10 maxLength2 11 maxLength3 For more information on drop precedence refer to the attribute shdsIRouter router traf ficPolicy J dropPrecedence tosMapped The data is redirected to the gueues based on the settings of the attribute shd slRouter router trafficPolicy tos2QueueMapping Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual Chapter 81195 Configuration attributes shdsiRouter router trafficPolicy dropPrecedence Use this attribute to define for each user configurable gueue how many Default Range table see below packets with a certain drop level may be gueued before they are dropped The dropPrecedence table contains the following elements Benet pe O maxLength1 This is the maximum length or drop level 1 Default 100 In case you set the attribute shdsiRouter routeritrafficP
272. ter security Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to create a list of passwords with associated access levels in order to avoid unauthorised access to the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router and the network The security table contains the following elements a password Enter here the password string You can then associ Default lt empty gt ate this password with a certain access level Range max 10 characters accessRights Use this element to change the access levels associ Default 111 ated with the password It is a bit string of which each Range bit string see below bit corresponds to an access level The different access levels are Bit o If you set this bit to on you are able to readAccess read all attributes except the security attributes writeAccess change all attributes except the security attributes Neither can you read the security attributes Some security related attributes however can be read but not changed securityAccess read and change the security attributes Important remarks e Ifyou create no passwords everybody has complete access e Ifyou define at least one password it is impossible to access the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router with one of the management systems without entering the correct password e Ifyou create a list of passwords create at least one with write and security access If not you will be unable to make config
273. ter wanlnterface ppp bridgePortlnfo priority shdsIRouter wanlnterface ppp bridgePortlnfo pathCost shdsIRouter waninterface hdlc oridgePortlnfo priority shdsIRouter waninterface hdlc oridgePortinfo pathCost 100 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration Example By changing the priority and or the pathCost you can create a preferred path path cost 10 path cost 10 root bridge Bridge C Bridge A Bridge B path cost 100 Bridge D By setting the path costs of Bridge A and B to a lower value than the path cost of Bridge D you can create a preferred path through Bridge A and B The path through Bridge D becomes the back up path Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 101 User manual Step by step configuration 5 9 9 Detecting Spanning Tree topology changes Detecting Spanning Tree topology changes on the LAN interface shdslRouter lanInterface bridgePortInfo topologyChangeDetection Default enabled The topologyChangeDetection element of the bridgePortlnfo structure enables or Range enabled disabled disables the communication of Spanning Tree topology changes to the root bridge enabled If a change in topology is detected by or notified to the bridge via this port then the bridge communicates this to the root bridge disabled then the bridge does not communicate this to the root bridge Detecting Spanning
274. terface frameRelay dlciTable This attribute gives the complete status information of all known DLCls The most important elements of the dlciTable table are dlci This is the DLCI identification number active This indicates whether the corresponding DLCI is active on or not off The following figure displays the DLCI table for the example in 6 2 LAN extension over a Frame Relay network on page 121 dieiT able dei gateway active new delete m bandwidth cllimLastCongestionCause_ gt 1 19 192 168 100 2 on on off off O none 136 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Troubleshooting 7 7 How to check the PPP status If the connection to the PPP network is not operational you could verify the states of the LCP IPCP or BCP protocol Do this by checking the following attributes ra shdslRouter laninterface ppp lcpState This attribute reflects the status of the LCP Link Control Protocol protocol Possible values are Initial LCP handshake has not started yet Starting Closed These values correspond with the transient states in the LCP state diagram Stopped Closing Stopping Req Sent The local side of the PPP link has sent an LCP request The remote side did not answer yet Ack Rcvd The local side of the PPP link has received an LCP acknowledge from the remote side This is a transient state Ack Sent The local side of the PPP link has acknowledged the
275. terface which is associated with the IP address of this entry The value applies to both the general broadcast the subnet and network broadcasts This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter shds Router lanInterface ipAdEntReasmMaxSize This attribute displays the size of the largest IP packet which this entity can re assemble from incoming IP fragmented packets received on this interface Value 0 means there is no re assembly This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter shdsIRouter laninterface bridgePortStatus This attribute displays the bridging status of the LAN interface The bridgePortStatus structure contains the following elements a SN E This displays the current state ofthe port Possible values are disabled The port is not in use because of a management action blocking The port does not participate in frame forwarding listening The port prepares to participate in frame forwarding but it does not update its MAC address database also called bridge cache learning The port prepares to participate in frame forwarding and it learns the present MAC addresses forwarding The port participates in frame forwarding 1 These are the only possible port states for a bridge that is not run ning the Spanning Tree protocol IEEE p802 1D For more detailed information on port states refer to Bridge port states on page 200 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 Reference manual Status attributes 219 ase e
276. ternal power supply with power cord 2 meter 20 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 2 3 Selecting a site AA WARNING gt Always place the unit on its feet without blocking the air vents Do not stack multiple units directly onto each other as stacking can cause heat build up that could dam age the equipment A ACHTUNG gt Stellen Sie das Ger t niemals seitlich sondern nur auf den F en auf und achten Sie darauf da die L ftungsschlitze an der Seitenverkleidung frei bleiben Stapeln Sie nicht mehrere Ger te direkt bereinander dies kann zu einem Hitzestau f hren Install the unit in an area free of extreme temperatures humidity shock and vibration Position it so that you can easily see and access the front panel and its control indicators Leave enough clearance at the back for cables and wires Position the unit within the correct distances for the different accesses and within 2m of a power outlet 9 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 2 21 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 2 4 installation and connection precautions ESD WARNING The circuit boards are sensitive to electrostatic discharges ESD and should be handled with care It is advisable to ensure an optimal electrical contact between yourself the working area and a safety ground before touching any circuit board Take special care not to t
277. th sides Check the wiring of the cable that connects the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router with the Ethernet hub or the network station The wiring should be as follows e astraight cable when connected to an Ethernet hub e acrossed cable when connected to a network station The following figure shows a cross 1 TX cable 2 TX 3 RX 4 5 6 RX 7 8 132 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Troubleshooting w pe o SSS Replace the cable you are using by another similar one Perhaps the RJ45 contacts are not good Check whether the Ethernet hub or Ethernet card of the network station is operational Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 133 User manual Troubleshooting 1 5 How to check the status of the WAN interface If the data traffic does not pass the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router then check whether the WAN interface is up and running Similar to the status of the LAN interface you can check the status of the WAN interface by means of a status attribute or a front panel LED The status attribute ifOperStatus If you are connected to the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router with a management tool simply look at the status of the ifOperStatus attribute ra shdslRouter laninterface ifOperStatus This attribute displays the current operation status of the WAN interface Possible values are The WAN interface is up data transfer is possible The following table shows you in which case the v
278. th the shdsIRouter router prior ityPolicy countingPolicy attribute This sets the relative importance of the gueue The weight element is only relevant in case the shd slRouter router priorityPolicy Jalgorithm attribute is set to absolutePriority or weightedFair Queueing Default 1 Range 1 10 shdsIRouter router priorityPolicy lowdelayQuotum This sets the number of bytes packets that is dequeued from the low delay Default 50 Range 1 25000 queue when the queue is addressed For more information on the low delay queue refer to 5 11 2 What is a priority queue on page 107 The unit of the quotum bytes or packets can be set with the shdsIRouter router priorityPolicy JcountingPolicy attribute 194 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes 8 10 Traffic policy configuration attributes The trafficPolicy object is not present in the containment tree by default If you want to use traffic policy then you have to add this object first Refer to 5 11 5 Adding a policy object on page 108 kal shdsIRouter router trafficPolicy method Default trafficShaping Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to choose a method for redirecting the data to a specific gueue The method attribute has the following values trafficShaping The data is redirected to the queues based on the settings of the attribute shd slRou
279. the response on an Inverse ARP request received on this DLCI active This indicates whether the corresponding DLCI is active on or not off new This is set to on if the DLCI has just been created else it is off deleted This is set to on if the DLCI has been deleted else it is off This element is only relevant for LMI revision 1 It is the flow control flag If it is on then no traffic can be sent on this DLCI Else it is off bandwidth This is the available bandwidth on this DLCI as it is communicated by the Frame Relay network cllmLastCongestion Cause CLLM Consolidated Link Layer Management is a Frame Relay protocol used for traffic management The cllmLastCongestionCause element indicates the last reason which was received from the network for congestion on the corresponding DLCI For possible values refer to the status attribute shdslRouter laninterface frameRelay cllm LastCongestionCause on page 225 bridgePortStatus This displays the bridging status of the Frame Relay WAN interface For more information refer to the status attribute shdsIRouter laninterface bridgePortSta tus on page 218 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 225 Reference manual Status attributes shdsiRouter laninterface frameRelay cllmLastCongestionCause This attribute indicates the last reason which was received from the network for congestion on any of the DLCls Possible values are none
280. then ticator uses the sysSecret attribute in order to verify the peer its response Default lt empty gt Range max 64 characters shdsIRouter router pppSecretTable Use this attribute for the CHAP authentication process Enter the CHAP name and secret of the remote router in this table The ripv2SecretTable table contains the following elements Default lt empty gt Range table see below P a Enter here the CHAP name of the remote router If the remote router is a Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Default lt empty gt Range max 64 characters then the name element should correspond with the remote Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router its sysName attribute Enter here the CHAP secret of the remote router If the remote router is a Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Default lt empty gt Range max 64 characters then the secret element should correspond with the remote Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router its sysSecret attribute Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router User manual 5 6 Configuring static routes Chapter 5 67 Step by step configuration Now you have to decide whether to use static routes or the RIPv2 routing protocol If your network exclusively uses the RIP routing protocol you may skip this section does not use the RIP routing protocol or only part read this section to learn how to define static of it does routes to the remote IP networks that have to be
281. this element displays sysUpTime the elapsed time since the last cold boot linkDownCount the number of times the link went down linkDownTime the total amount of time the link was down ra shdsIRouter wanlnterface line h24Line This attribute displays the 24 hours information summary of the line The h24Line table contains the same elements as the shdslRouter wanInterface line h2Line table ra shdsIRouter wanlnterface line d7Line This attribute displays the 7 days information summary of the line The d7Line table contains the same elements as the shdsIRouter wanlnterface line h2Line table ra shdslRouter wanlnterface line line This attribute displays the line information summary of the line since the last cold boot Except for the sysUpTime the line structure contains the same elements as the shdsIRouter waninterface line h2Line table Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 259 Reference manual Performance attributes i shdsiRouter wanlnterfacel line linePair 1 h2LineParameters This attribute displays the 2 hours parameter summary of the line The h2LineParameters table contains the following elements Element For the corresponding period this element displays sysUpTime the elapsed time since the last cold boot lineAttenuationMin the minimum line attenuation that was measured dB lineAttenuationAvrg the average line attenuation that was calculated dB lineAttenuation
282. tially 2048 simultaneous sockets can be initiated Sockets are freed using a garbage mechanism This means that every five minutes all sockets are checked If a socket has been released by PAT or NAT then this socket is returned to the pool of free sockets ICMP and UDP sockets are released when they have no data traffic during five minutes TCP sockets are released after the TCP session has been closed or when the session has been idle for 24 hours shdslRouter router natAllocFails If no sockets are available anymore but an attempt to set up a new connection is being made then the natAllocFails attribute value is incremented by 1 Because the sockets are distributed using a hashing function it is possible that natAllocFails increases even though natSocketsFree still indicates free sockets ICMP requires a new socket for each transmitted packet This implies that for instance a permanent ping or trace route command may eventually use all free sockets shdsIRouter router natDiscards This attribute indicates how many times a packet has been discarded for reasons other than a lack of free sockets This could be for instance because an attempt was made to connect from the Internet to a service that was not present in the servicesAvailable table shdsIRouter router natAddressesAvailable This attribute displays the number of NAT addresses that are currently free Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 10 263 Reference manual Perfor
283. tic table then the DHCP server replies with a BootP reply packet In this reply the IP address that is linked with the MAC address in question as defined in the dhcpStatic table is returned Ifthe source MAC address does not correspond with a MAC address in the dhcpStatic table then the DHCP server returns no response on that frame Releasing IP addresses DHCP versus BootP On DHCP level it is regularly checked whether the device that has an IP address in lease is still con nected to the network If it is not the IP address is returned to the pool of free IP addresses On BootP level however such a check or refresh does not exist What is more a statistic IP address lease is for an infinite time Consequently if the device that requested the IP address is no longer con nected to the network this is not detected by the server In that case the statistical information will still indicate that the IP address is leased although it is not Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 187 Reference manual Configuration attributes ra shdslRouter router dhcpCheckAddress Default disabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to allow that the assigned IP address is probed with an ICMP Echo Request This checks and prevents the double use of IP addresses The dhcpCheckAddress attribute has the following values enabled No ICMP Echo Request is sent when an IP address is leased by a client disabled An ICMP
284. ting and networking principles Your feedback Your satisfaction about this purchase is an extremely important priority to all of us at Telindus Accord ingly all electronic functional and cosmetic aspects of this new unit have been carefully and thoroughly tested and inspected If any fault is found with this unit or should you have any other quality related com ment concerning this delivery please submit the Quality Comment Form on our web page http www telindus com accessproducts viii Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Table of contents User and reference manual Table of contents Us r manual aaa 1 1 Introducing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router rrnnnnnnnnnnaa 3 1 1 The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router aicctccactiensudgtegeinighe Maaketta alad 4 1 2 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router applications rt 5 135 VVAN protoGOlS 155 rinda taheta aia Kia vala Tae 6 EAS TROWMIIGH kase k evian AAT A akadi vaen Aiamaa aata kaema 10 1 5 BEVIN Aa 11 1 6 Layer 2 TUNNEGI e mitta hi eea lt VEA eee EEEE E ea 12 Wel GAUL INSTA EEE EEEE E EAA 13 1 8 Management toolS 4 4wwsitdheskae mhhh kand talldccasteuasarterethewnaheds Aak 14 2 Installing and connecting the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 17 215 Safety INSTRUCTIONS aser kehi laine irie E As EEE 18 747 24000981 97214 18 0 ESE e STSEENE TASET TOME EST DST SU 19 PAR SSEISCHING ASIC AMET 20 2 4 Installation and connection precaution
285. to 11 5 WAN interface alarms on page 280 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 163 Reference manual Configuration attributes 8 5 WAN encapsulation configuration attributes This section discusses the configuration attributes of the encapsulation protocols that can be used on the WAN interface The following gives an overview of this section 8 5 1 Frame Relay configuration attributes on page 164 e 8 5 2 PPP configuration attributes on page 168 e 8 5 3 HDLC configuration attributes on page 170 164 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes 8 5 1 Frame Relay configuration attributes i shdslRouter wanInterface frameRelay diciTable Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to configure the Frame Relay Data Link Connection Iden tifiers DLCIs The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router can connect to multiple remote routers via different DLCls using a single WAN interface Through LMI Full Status Enquiry messages the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router can learn its active and inactive DLCls If the Frame Relay network also supports the Inverse ARP protocol the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router can learn the IP address of the corresponding router for each DLCI If however neither LMI nor Inverse ARP is supported by the Frame Relay network then you can define which DLCI number corresponds with which remote router in the diciTable This is also called static routing o
286. uch applications are Telnet HTTP and FTP The TCP header con tains a port field indicating the higher layer protocol This is a connection less protocol user data can be sent without first building a session Examples of such applications are SNMP and TFTP Although TFTP is session oriented it builds the session at a higher level and uses UDP for its simplicity as transport protocol The UDP header contains a port field indicating the higher layer protocol This is a connection less protocol user data can be sent without first building a session An example of such an application is ping These protocols do not have port num bers Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 81 User manual Step by step configuration As said before depending on the IP transport protocol the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router takes different actions For the outgoing traffic towards the Internet the following actions are taken Transport protocol TCP When a session is started a specific port number is assigned to this session All traffic from this session is assigned this specific port number The specific port number is freed within 5 minutes after the TCP session is closed i e after TCP Reset or TCP Finish is seen If the session has not been properly closed the port number is freed 24 hours after the last session traffic This time is configurable refer to the attribute shdslRouter router natTcpSocketTimeOut on page 183 The Sou
287. ues noTranslation The port numbers that fall within the defined port range are not translated deny Packets with port numbers in that fall within the defined port range are discarded 182 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes shdslRouter router servicesAvailable Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to define specific port number ranges for incoming Internet traffic that should not be translated Instead it is sent to the corresponding private IP address The servicesAvailable table makes it possible to have a server on the local network that can be accessed from the Internet although it has no official IP address The servicesAvailable table contains the following elements Jia NSU EE protocol This selects the protocol tcp or udp Default tcp Range tcp udp startPort This defines the lowest value of the TCP or UDP port Pefault 0 range Range 0 65535 endPort This defines the highest value of the TCP or UDP port Default lt Opt gt range Range 0 65535 If no endPort value is defined lt Opt gt then the port range is limited to the startPort value only serverAddress This sets the private server address Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 If a packet is received with a source port number in the previously specified range it is sent to the private server ad
288. ult value alarmMask enabled alarmLevel Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 11 281 Reference manual Alarm attributes 11 6 Line alarms For general information on the alarm attributes refer to 11 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 275 shdsIRouter wanlnterface line alarminfo The alarms related to the line object together with their explanation and default alarmMask and alarmLevel value is given in the following table The alarm is generated Default value alarmMask alarmLevel linkDown when the line is down l e no data can be transmitted enabled 3 over the line 282 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Reference manual 11 7 Routing alarms Chapter 11 Alarm attributes For general information on the alarm attributes refer to 11 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 275 ra shdsIRouter router alarminfo The alarms related to the router object together with their explanation and default alarmMask and alarmLevel value is given in the following table The alarm is generated pingActive in case of a pending ping for example an indefinite ping This notification is necessary because you can only transmit one ping at a time Furthermore there is no pro tection when a new ping is started before the previous is stopped Default value alarmMask enabled alarmLevel Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 12 283 Reference manual TMA su
289. umber ranges that should not be translated Some TCP or UDP applications do not allow port translations these applications reguire a dedicated source port number In the portTranslations table you can define UDP and TCP port ranges that should not be translated Ifa packet with a source port number in such a range is received PAT replaces only the source IP address provided it is the first device using this port number When other devices using the same application hence the same port number try to send traffic to the same Internet destination address PAT discards this traffic It is also possible to define port ranges that PAT should always discard The port translation range PAT uses goes from 60928 up to 65535 The portTranslations table contains the following elements ETS pe O O protocol This selects the protocol tcp or udp Default tcp Range tcp udp startPort This defines the lowest value of the TCP or UDP port Pefault 0 range Range 0 65535 endPort This defines the highest value of the TCP or UDP port Default lt Opt gt range Range 0 65535 If no endPort value is defined lt Opt gt then the port range is limited to the startPort value only action If a packet is received with a source port number in _ Default noTranslation the previously specified range a certain action canbe Range enumerated see below taken The action element has the following val
290. updates are received anymore For other routes this attribute always displays 00000d 00h 00m 00s Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 235 Reference manual Status attributes ra shdslRouter router natAddresses This attribute displays the status of each official IP address which is configured in the natAddresses con figuration attribute The natAddresses table contains the following elements I officialAddress This is the official IP address you entered it in the natAddresses configuration attribute privateAddress This is the private IP address that is currently linked with the official IP address status This is the status ofthe official IP address Possible values are free This official IP address is currently not in use fixed This address has a pre configured mapping between the official and private IP address allocated This official IP address is currently assigned to a private IP address but it is not fixed This indicates how many sessions are currently used by this official IP address Ifthe attribute value becomes zero the assigned official IP address becomes free again and can be assigned to another private IP address ra shdslRouter router dhcpBinding This attribute contains a list of dynamically assigned i e leased IP addresses The dhcpBinding table contains the following elements C DEAD ipAddress This is the IP address that is dynamically assigned to a client
291. uration and password changes after activation of the new configuration Security attributes The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router has the following security attributes e shdslRouter security e shdslRouter laninterface accessList extendedAccessList bridgeAccessList and rip2Authentication shdslRouter wanlnterface accessList extendedAccessList bridgeAccessList and rip2Authentication e shdsIRouter wanlnterface ppp authentication and authenPeriod shdslRouter router sysSecret pppSecretTable and ripv2SecretTable shdsIRouter management accessList snmp telnet and tftp 148 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 8 Reference manual Configuration attributes Entering passwords The following table explains how to enter passwords in the different management systems Management system How to enter the password TMA Enter the password in the connect window TMA CLI and TMA for Use the application TmaUserConf exe to create a TMA user and assign a HP OpenView password to this user The password should correspond with a password configured in the device For more information refer to the manual of TMA CLI or TMA for HP Open View Enter the password after the destination file name Separate password and file name by a Example tml fsourcefileedestinationfile pwd CLI You are prompted to enter the password when the session starts ATWIN You are prompted to enter the password when the CLI session starts
292. uration message information stored by this port This port identifier is used e together with the designatedPriority and designatedMac attributes to determine whether this port should be the designated port for the LAN that is currently connected to this port by the management system to determine the topology of the bridged LAN topologyChangeAck This displays the value of the Topology Change Acknowledgement flag in the next Configuration BPDU that will be transmitted on this port This attribute is used to assess the need to set the Topology Change Acknowl edgement flag in response to a received Topology Change Notification BPDU configurationPend This is used to determine whether a Configuration BPDU should be transmitted on ing this port after expiry of the hold timer This avoids that Configuration BPDUs are transmitted too often although ensuring that up to date information is transmitted WS shdsIRouter laninterface clearArpCache If you execute this action the ARP cache table is cleared 220 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 Reference manual Status attributes 9 4 WAN interface status attributes Several status attributes of the WAN interface are the same as on the LAN interface Therefore they are not explained here again These attributes are ipAddress ipNetMask secondarylpAddresses ifDescr ifType ifMtu and ifLastChange For a complete description of these attributes refer to 9 3
293. ute through the tunnel Once the tunnel is set up it is easy to configure a route through this tunnel Just use the remote IP address of the tunnel as gateway for the network you want to reach gt get routingTable routingTable a network 10 1 1 0 mask 255 255 255 0 gateway 192 168 5 2 interface lt OPT gt preference 10 metric 2 126 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuration examples Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 127 User manual Troubleshooting 7 Troubleshooting If you experience problems with establishing a connection to the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router or with its configuration you may find the answer to your problem in this chapter The following gives an overview of this chapter 7 4 You can not contact the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router over an IP connection on page 128 7 2 You can not contact the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router over a serial connection on page 129 7 3 How to troubleshoot the configuration on page 130 7 4 How to check the status of the LAN interface on page 131 7 5 How to check the status of the WAN interface on page 133 7 6 How to check the Frame Relay status on page 135 7 7 How to check the PPP status on page 136 7 8 How to check the routing status on page 137 128 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 7 User manual Troubleshooting TA You can not contact the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router over an IP connection If you can not establ
294. ute to determine which mechanism is used to queue the data when the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router experiences an overload condition The algorithm attribute has the following values fifo This is a First In First Out queue The data that enters the queue first also leaves the queue first This is the fastest but most superficial queuing mechanism roundRobin This is a priority queuing mechanism In this case all queues containing data have an equal weight disregarding the setting of the weight element in the shdslRouter router priorityPolicy JgueueConfigurations attribute absolutePriority This is a priority queuing mechanism In this case queues with a high priority have absolute priority over gueues with a low priority In other words no lower priority gueue is emptied as long as a higher priority gueue contains data The priority of the queues runs parallel to the queue number l e the user config urable queue number 1 has the lowest priority whereas the system queue number 7 has the highest priority For the queue numbers refer to 5 11 2 What is a priority queue on page 107 Note that there is a risk of starvation This means that it is possible that the lower weight queues are never emptied because a higher weight queue continuously receives data weightedFair This is a priority queuing mechanism In this case the queues are emptied based Queueing on their weight The weight can be configured in the shdsIRouter r
295. uter natAddresses officialAddress 172 31 74 1 privateAddress 2 2 2 2 In that case the manage ment tool service runs on the WAN IP address This means however that the WAN has to be up Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 89 User manual Step by step configuration 5 8 7 Combining PAT and NAT It is possible to use a combination of PAT and NAT However make sure the PAT address does not appear in the NAT address table How does the PAT NAT combination work The router first assigns NAT addresses until they are all used Then it uses PAT addresses for further translations 90 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 User manual Step by step configuration 5 9 Configuring bridging This section explains how to configure the bridging functionality of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this section 5 9 1 Enabling bridging on page 93 5 9 2 Selecting a bridging protocol on page 94 5 9 3 What is Spanning Tree on page 95 5 9 4 What is the Spanning Tree root bridge on page 96 5 9 5 Spanning Tree topology on page 97 5 9 6 Spanning Tree behaviour on page 99 5 9 7 What is Spanning Tree priority and cost on page 100 5 9 8 Setting Spanning Tree priorities and costs on page 101 5 9 9 Detecting Spanning Tree topology changes on page 103 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 91 User manual Step by step configuration 5 9 1 Enabling bridging If you want to use the br
296. utes as with TMA but in a more basic textual representation using a VT100 terminal For more information refer to the Maintenance Tools manual CLI CLI is also a Command Line Interface although not so extensive as TMA CLI Experienced users who are familiar with the syntax can access the Telindus devices more quickly than with TMA or ATWIN For more information refer to the Maintenance Tools manual Web Interface The Web Interface is an ATWIN alike menu driven user interface You can read and change all attributes as with TMA but in a more basic representation using a web browser For more information refer to the Maintenance Tools manual EasyConnect terminal Connecting the Telindus EasyConnect hand held terminal through the auxiliary connector to the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router allows you to manage the Aster 5 in a basic way using the LCD display and keyboard This is called keyboard man agement For more information refer to the Maintenance Tools manual Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 1 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 15 Management Description and reference tool SNMP You can manage the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router through SNMP using any SNMP browser The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router supports MIB2 and a private MIB including traps The private MIB comes with your copy of TMA After installation of the TMA data files the private MIB file is available in directory C Progr
297. val After the route is down it is deleted after 4 times the ripUpdatelnterval kal shdsIRouter router ripv2SecretTable Use this attribute to authenticate the routing updates Default lt empty gt Range table see below The ripv2SecretTable holds the secrets used for the RIP authentication Authentication can be enabled or disabled on each interface refer to the configuration attribute shdsIRouter laninterface rip2Authentication on page 154 The ripv2SecretTable table contains the following elements keyld This is a unique identifier for each secret Default 0 Range 0 255 secret This is a string of maximum 16 characters It is sent with the RIP updates on the specified interface It is also used to authenticate incoming RIP updates Default lt empty gt Range max 16 characters interface This specifies the interface on which the secret is used The interface element has the following values The secret is used on all interfaces The secret is used on the Ethernet interface only The secret is used on the serial interface only D Remarks e If authentication is enabled either text or md5 then only updates using that authentication are proc essed All other updates on that interface are discarded e Ifyou use md5 and if for a certain interface multiple secrets are present in the ripv2SecretTable then the first entry in the ripv2SecretTable is used to
298. ver voltage and over current protection compliance wre 313 15 AO EMG Compliance res riene eiie lE alal aiva data ea 314 15 11 Environmental compliance nimnnnnnenenennnenanenanenneennneannenenennennannan nene 314 xii Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Table of contents User and reference manual ANNK Jian St maaala Pe OP 9 9 Sr maia eee Re atu 315 Annex A common TCP and UDP numbers 2 2 c0eceeceeceeceeececeeceeececeeceeceeceeeees 317 Annex B product information rnnnannnananannannnanannnnnennnnnnnnnnanana annan na 319 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 1 User manual User manual 2 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router User manual Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 1 3 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 1 Introducing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router This chapter gives an introduction to the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The following gives an overview of this chapter 1 1 The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router on page 4 1 2 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router applications on page 5 1 3 WAN protocols on page 6 1 4 Routing on page 10 e 1 5 Bridging on page 11 e 1 6 Layer 2 tunnelling on page 12 e 1 7 Auto install on page 13 e 1 8 Management tools on page 14 4 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 1 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 1 1 The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router is an S HDSL bas
299. will reply The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router uses this received IP address as its WAN IP address Possibly it also uses this as its LAN IP address depending on the setting ofthe autolnstall Mode configuration attribute refer to shdslRouter wanInterface autolnstallMode on page 160 The IP address is assigned to both interfaces since the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router can operate with a numbered or unnumbered WAN interface However it does not store the IP address in non volatile memory Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 13 291 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 13 5 Getting the configuration with TFTP Once the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router has obtained an IP address itis reachable over e its LAN interface in case it received a LAN IP address from a BootP server on the local LAN its WAN interface in case it received a WAN IP address via the PPP or Frame Relay link Now you can start a TMA or a Telnet session on the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router and configure it Alternatively the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router can retrieve its complete configuration without any user intervention As long as the previously obtained IP addresses are not stored in non volatile memory the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router tries to get a complete configuration file from a TFTP server The configuration file and TFTP The Trivial File Transfer Protocol is typically used in combination with BootP to obtain the configuration of a device fr
300. write access e read only in case of a status performance and alarm attribute Example The configuration attribute ripMode can be set to the value disabled passive or active structured value Some attribute values contain underlying values a structured value These values are displayed in the structured value window If an attribute contains structured val ues then a bit string lt Table gt or lt Struct gt is displayed after the attribute Example The alarmLevel attribute contains a structured value which displays alarms and their corresponding priority level Groups assemble a set of attributes related by functionality There are four groups in TMA which correspond with the four tabs in the attribute window configuration status performance alarms Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 43 User manual Managing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router action A group in combination with an object may have actions assigned to them These actions are displayed in the action window Example The Activate Configuration action only appears when the object shdslRouter is selected in combination with the group Configuration 44 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router 4 5 The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router containment tree The following table lists the different objects of the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router containment tree Object 0 This object contain
301. xam ple of a network topology 82 324 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Annex introducing alarm attributes 275 auto install 13 bridging 11 Frame Relay 7 HDLC 9 layer 2 tunnelling 12 management terminology 41 management tools 14 PPP 8 router applications 5 routing 10 the device 4 WAN protocols 6 introduction 3 IP addresses basic configura tion 54 L L2TP status authentication states 242 call states 240 control states 239 delivery states 241 L2TP tunnel configuration attributes 188 performance attributes 266 setting up a 107 status attributes 237 LAN extension over a Frame Relay network a configura tion example 121 LAN extension over a PDH SDH network a configura tion example 120 LAN interface alarms 279 configuration attributes 152 performance attributes 252 status attributes 215 troubleshooting 131 layer 2 tunnelling introduction 12 Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol how works the 105 terminology 106 LED indicators 26 collision LED 30 introduction 27 LAN receive data LED 30 LAN transmit data LED 30 power LED 28 receive data LED 29 status modes 27 test LED 28 transmit data LED 29 line alarms 281 basic configuration 55 configuration attributes 171 performance attributes 258 status attributes 232 line specifications 309 connector lay out 309 maximum covered distance 310 LMI what is 61 loading the default configura tion 51 with a DIP switch 52 with TMA 53 management
302. y more than 1 up to a maximum of 15 You could do this for instance to indicate that a certain interface is less desirable to route through As a result the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router adds this value to the metric parameter of every route learnt through that interface The metric attribute is also used to represent the directly connected subnets on the LAN and WAN interfaces Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 5 69 User manual Step by step configuration Example of a default route isp 7 ja N Internet w IP address WAN interface 192 168 100 3 In this example an office is connected via a modem link over a network of an operator to an Internet Service Provider ISP The Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router in the office does not need any static routes All traffic is sent to the ISP Hence the Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router its default route is towards the Inter net gateway 192 168 100 3 interface wan office Router modem modem oo IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 70 Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router User manual Chapter 5 Step by step configuration ra shdsIRouter router routingTable Use this attribute to configure the static IP routes The routingTable table contains the following elements Default lt empty gt Range table see below Laas rr network This is the IP address ofthe destination network Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 25
303. y has been detected within the preceding topologyChangeTime period The topologyChange element is used to propagate the topology change indication in transmitted Configuration BPDUs e determine whether the short bridgeForwardDelay or long bridgeTimeOut time out or ageing value is used to purge dynamic MAC addresses from the bridge cache topologyChange Detection This is a Boolean value 0 or 1 to report that a topology change has been detected by or notified to the bridge topologyChange Time This displays the time during which the root bridge transmits Configuration BPDUs indicating a topology change after it detected this topology change The topologyChangeTime element value is equal to the sum of the root bridge its bridgeMaxAge element value and bridgeForwardDelay element value For more information on the latter two elements refer to the configuration attribute shdslRouter bridge spanningTree on page 198 WS shdsiRouter bridge clearBridgeCache If you execute this action the bridge cache table is cleared 245 246 m of al Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router Chapter 9 Reference manual Status attributes 9 10 Management status attributes shdslRouter management cms2Address This attribute displays the absolute device address as you configured it shdslRouter management loopback ipAddress This attribute displays the IP address of the loop back interface as you configured it

Telindus 1420 SHDSL Router

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents